Fuji Xerox Versant 80 Press User Manual Download Page 95 | Manualshive

Page: 95 / 1019

background image

Paper Types

95

P

a

pe
r an
d

Ot
h

e

r M

e

di

a

3

* : The following types of long-length paper are available.

Uncoated : 52 - 220 gsm (Ream Weight : 55.0 - 189.1 kg)
Coated, Cast Coated, Transparency : 72 - 220 gsm (Ream Weight : 61.9 - 189.1 kg)
Recycled : 72 - 105 gsm (Ream Weight : 61.9 - 90.2 kg)

301 - 350

X

X

Transfer Paper

129 - 176

X

O

O
X

:
:

Paper can be used.
Paper cannot be used.

Tray 1, 2, 3

Tray 5 (Bypass)

*

Paper Type

Basis Weight

Selection Group

(Unit: gsm)

64 - 256 gsm

Ream Weight:

55.0 - 220.1 kg

52 - 300 gsm

Ream Weight:

44.7 - 257.9 kg

«
...
93
94
95
96
97
...
»

Summary of Contents for Versant 80 Press

Page 1: ...User Guide Versant 80 Press ...

Page 2: ...ymbol Always read and follow the instructions before performing the required procedures As the copying machine contains a feature designed to prevent forging of certain documents there may be rare instances where copies or scanned images do not achieve the desired results The data saved in the hard disk of the machine may be lost if there is any problem in the hard disk Fuji Xerox is not responsib...

Page 3: ...ICT and COMPDIC 29 Cyrus SASL 30 Newlib 30 About Qt 44 About Software Applied to LGPL 44 Other Licenses 52 2 Product Overview 53 Machine Components 54 Power Source 64 Switching the Main Power On 64 Switching the Power On 64 Switching the Power Off 65 Switching the Main Power Off 66 Ground Fault Interrupter 67 Interface Cables 68 Using the USB Interface 68 Using the Ethernet Interface 68 Power Save...

Page 4: ...tings 123 4 Copy 125 Copying Procedure 126 Step 1 Loading Documents 126 Step 2 Selecting Features 128 Step 3 Entering a Quantity 129 Step 4 Starting the Copy Job 129 Step 5 Confirming the Copy Job in Job Status 130 Operations during Copying 132 Stopping the Copy Job 132 Changing the Number of Copies 133 Interrupting the Copy Job 134 Simple Copy 135 Paper Supply Selecting the Paper for Copying 135 ...

Page 5: ...Rotation Changing the Orientation of Images 172 Output Format 174 2 Sided Copying Making 2 Sided Copies 174 Booklet Creation Creating a Bound Booklet 175 Covers Attaching Covers to Copies 179 Pages per Side Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet 180 Poster Making Enlarged Copies Spread over Multiple Sheets 181 Repeat Image Making Multiple Copies on One Sheet 183 Annotations Adding a Comment a Date ...

Page 6: ...File Format for Output Data 246 Network Scanning 259 Preview Previewing the Scanned Images during a Scan Job 260 Color Scanning Selecting an Output Color 260 2 Sided Scanning Scanning Both Sides of a Document 260 Original Type Selecting the Document Type 260 File Format Selecting a File Format for Output Data 260 Scan to PC 261 Transfer Protocol Selecting a Transfer Protocol 262 Address Book 262 A...

Page 7: ...twork Computer 283 Advanced Settings 285 Color Scanning Selecting an Output Color 285 Original Type Selecting the Document Type 285 Photographs Scanning a Color Photograph 286 Image Options Adjusting Scan Density and Image Sharpness 286 Image Enhancement Erasing the Background Color of Documents Adjusting Contrast 287 Shadow Suppression Suppressing the Document Background 287 Color Space Specifyin...

Page 8: ...Sheets 323 Job Flow Procedure 324 Step 1 Opening the Job Flow Sheets Screen 324 Step 2 Selecting a Job Flow Sheet 324 Step 3 Confirming Changing the Job Flow Sheet 325 Step 4 Starting the Job Flow Sheet 325 Selecting Changing a Job Flow Sheet 326 8 Stored Programming 329 Stored Programming Overview 330 Registering Deleting Renaming Stored Programs 331 Registering Stored Programs 332 Notes and Rest...

Page 9: ...ng and Deleting Stored Jobs 362 Secure Print 362 Sample Set 366 Delayed Print 369 Charge Print 372 Private Charge Print 376 Printing Pending Jobs 380 Handling Error Terminations 381 12 Computer Operations 383 Features Overview 384 Print 385 Print Features 385 Setup 386 Printing 387 Converting Paper Types 387 E mail Printing 389 Setup 389 Receiving E Mail 389 Registering Destinations 390 Importing ...

Page 10: ...etion by E mail 445 Plug in Settings 446 Other Settings 446 Copy Service Settings 457 Copy Tab Features Allocation 457 Preset Buttons 458 Copy Defaults 458 Copy Control 463 Original Size Defaults 466 Reduce Enlarge Presets 467 Custom Colors 467 Annotations Create Comments 467 Connectivity Network Setup 468 Port Settings 468 Protocol Settings 473 Machine s E mail Address Host Name 477 Proxy Server ...

Page 11: ...eet Keyword 532 Add Address Book Entry 532 Paper Tray Attributes 535 Accounting 536 Create View User Accounts 536 View Accounts 539 Reset User Accounts 539 System Administrator s Meter Copy Jobs 540 Accounting Type 540 Accounting Login Screen Settings 541 Authentication Security Settings 543 System Administrator Settings 543 Authentication 544 Allow User to Disable Active Settings 552 Job Status D...

Page 12: ...iguring E mail Environment 578 CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items 579 17 Scanner Environment Settings 581 Scan Service Overview 582 Configuration of Store to Folder 584 Step 1 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP IP 584 Step 2 Registering a Folder 585 Step 3 Configuring a Computer 585 Configuration of Scan to PC 586 Step 1 Preparations 586 Step 2 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP IP 587 Step 3 ...

Page 13: ...n Files 605 Configuration of HTTP Communications Encryption 606 Installation Overview 606 Step1 Configuration on the Machine 606 Step2 Configuration on the Computer 607 Configuration of Encryption using IPSec 608 Installation Overview 608 Step1 Import and Configuration of a Certificate 608 Step2 Configuration on the Machine Configuration of IPSec 609 Step3 Configuration on the Computer 610 Configu...

Page 14: ...50 Changing the Default Authorization Group Settings 653 Creating an Authorization Group 653 Configuration for IC Card Reader Sold Separately 655 Step 1 Preparations 655 Step 2 Logout Method Using the Smart Card 655 Step 3 Registering Smart Card Information 656 Configuration for Account Administration 657 Step 1 Selecting an Accounting Type 657 Step 2 Registering User Information 657 User Authenti...

Page 15: ...nt Semi Auto Process Using Scanner 704 Density Uniformity Adjustment 704 Density Uniformity Adjustment Manual Process 706 Density Uniformity Adjustment 706 Fold Position Adjustment 709 Fold Position Adjustment 709 Single Fold Position Adjustment 710 Booklet Position Adjustment 711 C Fold Position Adjustment 712 Z Fold Position Adjustment 714 Z Fold Half Sheet Position Adjustment 715 Adjust Paper C...

Page 16: ...t Catch Tray 866 Paper Jams in the Transport Unit V1 866 Paper Jams in C3 Finisher or C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker 868 Paper Jams in the Finisher D4 the Finisher D4 with Booklet or the Finisher D5 873 Paper Jams in the Interface Module 885 Paper Jams in the High Capacity Stacker 887 Paper Jams in the Squarefold Trimmer Module 894 Paper Jams in the Finishing Transport Module 896 Document Jams 900...

Page 17: ...and Restrictions on the Use of the Copy Feature 985 Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Print Feature 985 Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Scan Features 988 Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the E mail 994 Notes and Restrictions when Connecting with Internet Service Provider 995 Notes and Restrictions on the Interrupt Mode 997 Notes and Restrictions on Folders 998 Notes and Restric...

Page 18: ...18 Index 1007 ...

Page 19: ...1 Before Using the Machine This chapter describes how to use this guide as well as about licenses z Preface 20 z Types of Manuals 21 z Using This Guide 22 z About License 25 z About Qt 44 ...

Page 20: ...etworks When you need additional information refer to the manuals provided with the personal computer operating system and network products The machine supports printing and scanning with the Print Server For capabilities of and how to operate the Print Server refer to the manual supplied with your Print Server After reading this guide be sure to keep it handy for quick reference It will be useful...

Page 21: ...to import scanned data to a computer from the machine Important To display the help for CentreWare Internet Services users need to have the environment to connect to the Internet The communication fee shall be borne by you User Guide For Google Cloud Print TM The manual describes how to use Google Cloud Print for printing Manuals Provided with Print Server The Print Server to be connected to the m...

Page 22: ... the types of paper and other media that you can use on the machine and how to load media in a tray 4 Copy Describes the basic operations and features for the Copy service 5 Scan Describes the basic operations and features for the Scan services 6 Send from Folder Describes the basic operations and features to use folders 7 Job Flow Sheets Describes the operations to use a job flow created on a rem...

Page 23: ...he machine has the Authentication feature to restrict the availability of services for each feature and the Accounting feature to manage the use of each feature based on the Login Type selected 19 Machine Status Describes how to replace consumables and to clean the machine 22 Problem Solving Describes troubleshooting procedures to solve the problems with the machine 23 Appendix Contains a glossary...

Page 24: ...een z Names of menus commands windows or dialog boxes displayed on the computer screen and their buttons and menu names button Hardware buttons on the control panel key Keys on the keyboard of the computer z Path to a certain item within a procedure on the control panel For example When you see the procedure select Tools Setup Create Folder this means that you need to select Tools select Setup and...

Page 25: ... OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE JPEG Code Our printer ...

Page 26: ... of FreeBSD codes The FreeBSD Copyright Copyright 1994 2006 The FreeBSD Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must r...

Page 27: ...ng this software is available at http www umich edu dirsvcs ldap ldap html This work also contains materials derived from public sources Additional information about OpenLDAP can be obtained at http www openldap org Portions Copyright 1998 2006 Kurt D Zeilenga Portions Copyright 1998 2006 Net Boolean Incorporated Portions Copyright 2001 2006 IBM Corporation All rights reserved Redistribution and u...

Page 28: ...R THE AUTHOR S OR OWNER S OF THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY ...

Page 29: ...tionary files are licensed to customers under the terms and conditions of a Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike License Prior to use be sure to check the terms and conditions of this license at the URL below Use of these Japanese English dictionaries is not permitted unless you agree to the terms and conditions of this license Furthermore care should be taken because at the point in time that ...

Page 30: ...re from several sources Each file may have its own copyright license that is embedded in the source file Unless otherwise noted in the body of the source file s the following copyright notices will apply to the contents of the newlib subdirectory 1 Red Hat Incorporated Copyright c 1994 2009 Red Hat Inc All rights reserved 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this...

Page 31: ...AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILI...

Page 32: ...118 Advanced Micro Devices Inc 29K Support Products Mail Stop 573 5900 E Ben White Blvd Austin TX 78741 800 292 9263 5 6 7 Sun Microsystems Copyright C 1993 by Sun Microsystems Inc All rights reserved Developed at SunPro a Sun Microsystems Inc business Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software is freely granted provided that this notice is preserved 8 Hewlett Packard c Copyright 1...

Page 33: ...CULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARI...

Page 34: ...erials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLU...

Page 35: ... to use copy modify and distribute this software for any purpose without fee is hereby granted provided that this entire notice is included in all copies of any software which is or includes a copy or modification of this software and in all copies of the supporting documentation for such software THIS SOFTWARE IS BEING PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY IN PARTICULAR THE AUTHO...

Page 36: ...ification and use in source and binary forms is permitted provided that the above copyright notice and following paragraph are duplicated in all such forms This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE 21 Free Software Foundation LGPL License linux targets only Copyright C 1990 1999 2000 2001 Free Software Fou...

Page 37: ...hout any express or implied warranty permission to use copy modify and distribute this file for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice and this notice appears in allcopies and that the name of Hewlett Packard Company not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission Hewlett Packar...

Page 38: ...TED TO THEIMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABIL...

Page 39: ...NESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 30 Alex Tatmanjants targets using libc posix Copyright c 1995 Alex Tatmanjants alex elvisti kiev ua at Electronni Visti IA Kiev Ukraine All rights reserved ...

Page 40: ...is list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIR...

Page 41: ...M Ltd arm and thumb variant targets only Copyright c 2009 ARM Ltd All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce t...

Page 42: ...cumentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of Texas Instruments Incorporated nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED...

Page 43: ...mission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT ...

Page 44: ...his license the Lesser General Public License applies to some specially designated software packages typically libraries of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it You can use it too but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case based on the explanations bel...

Page 45: ...brary the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work a derivative of the original library The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library We call this license the Lesser General Public License because it d...

Page 46: ...Source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For a library complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they...

Page 47: ...r other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on...

Page 48: ...he Library will still fall under Section 6 Otherwise if the work is a derivative of the Library you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6 Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6 whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself 6 As an exception to the Sections above you may also combine or link a work that uses the Library wi...

Page 49: ...le that you distribute 7 You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side by side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License and distribute such a combined library provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted and provided that you do these two...

Page 50: ...ions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 12 If the dis...

Page 51: ...D OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries If you develop a new library and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms or alternatively under the terms of the ordinary General Public License To apply these terms ...

Page 52: ...s cpp FreeType 2 freetype version 2 3 6 HarfBuzz harfbuzz JavaScriptCore WebCore WebKit Easing Equations by Robert Penner Shift JIS Text Codec ISO 2022 JP JIS Text Codec EUC JP Text Codec EUC KR Text Codec GBK Text Codec Big5 HKSCS Text Codec Big5 Text Codec QImage The qtmain Library QRegion QDate weekNumber QLocale TSCII Text Codec Drag and Drop QtSvg Module Phonon Module QtXmlPatterns Module Par...

Page 53: ...onents how to switch the machine on and off and how to use the touch screen z Machine Components 54 z Power Source 64 z Ground Fault Interrupter 67 z Interface Cables 68 z Power Saver Mode 70 z Cooling Mode 73 z Control Panel 74 z About the Services Home Screen 84 z Touch Screen 88 z Entering Text 90 ...

Page 54: ...ation refer to Power Source P 64 5 Machine front toner cover Open this cover to replace toner cartridges 6 Machine front door Open this door to clear paper jams or replace consumables 7 Tray 1 2 3 Load paper here Note The machine is not equipped with Tray 4 8 Bottom left door Open this door to clear paper jams 9 Casters Used to move the machine Lock them after installation 10 Tray 5 Bypass Used fo...

Page 55: ...lt interrupter Automatically turns the machine off when a current leakage is detected 4 Bottom right door Open this door to clear paper jams 5 Waste toner container door Open this door to replace the waste toner container 6 Waste toner container Used to collect waste toner 7 Decurler handle 2b Flattens curled paper Open this decurler when clearing paper jams 8 Fusing unit Fuses toner on paper Impo...

Page 56: ... top cover is opened Open this cover widely to clear document jams 3 Document feeder top cover Open this cover to clear document jams 4 Document guides Use these guides to align the edges of documents 5 Document feeder tray Load documents here 6 Document stopper Holds large size documents such as A3 in place Open this stopper rightward when using it 7 Document output tray Scanned documents are del...

Page 57: ...w 2 HCF B1 optional 2 1 3 No Component Function 1 Tray 6 Load paper here 2 Tray 6 top cover Move Tray 6 HCF B1 to the left and then open this top cover to clear paper jams 3 Paper check window The remaining amount of paper can be confirmed ...

Page 58: ...ing non standard paper that cannot be loaded in Trays 1 to 3 6 and 7 3 Tray 5 Bypass top cover Open this cover to clear paper jams 4 Error lamp If a paper jam occurs this lamp lights up 5 Front door of the High Capacity Feeder Open this door to clear paper jams This unit conveys paper supplied from Tray 5 Bypass 6 and 7 to the machine 6 Paper check window The remaining amount of paper can be confi...

Page 59: ...ontainer when discarding the punch scraps 3 Output tray Outputs are delivered here 4 Finisher tray Outputs are delivered here 5 Staple cartridge Staples are stored in this cartridge Pull out this cartridge to replace staples or clear staple jams 6 Booklet tray Bound booklets are delivered here 7 Finisher front door Open this door to clear paper or staple jams replace staples or discard punch scrap...

Page 60: ...klet tray button 1 Press this button to deliver booklets to retrieval position 8 Finisher right door Open this cover to clear paper jams replace a staple cartridge or remove jammed staples or punch scraps 9 Booklet staple cartridges 1 Two staple cartridges for booklet Remove these cartridges when replacing them with new ones or when clearing staple jams 10 Staple waste container Receives scraps fr...

Page 61: ...page to the stacker output tray 4 Paper eject button Press this button when removing paper after copying 5 Stacker output tray A sample page or sample set of a document is delivered in this tray 6 Ground fault interrupter Interface Module Automatically shuts off electricity in the event of current leakage 7 Ground fault interrupter High Capacity Stacker Automatically shuts off electricity in the e...

Page 62: ...nt of current leakage 4 Booklet tray Outputs are delivered here when Fold Only Fold Staple or Booklet Trimming Pressing is selected 5 Squarefold setting button Use this button to adjust the amount of pressure applied to the spine of booklets when the spine is flattened 6 Error lamp If a paper jam occurs the lamp of the jammed location lights up 7 Trimmer waste container Collects scraps from the tr...

Page 63: ...t a 3rd vendor finisher to the Finisher D5 The 3rd vendor finisher may be unavailable in some countries or regions For details on the functions of your 3rd vendor finisher refer to the manual supplied with the device 2 1 No Component Function 1 Error lamp Illuminates when a paper jam occurs 2 Cover Open this cover to clear paper jams ...

Page 64: ...emory or cause a machine malfunction 1 Make sure that the power cord is plugged in correctly 2 Open the machine front door 3 Press the main power switch to the position to switch the main power on The Main Power indicator lights up on the control panel 4 Close the machine front door Switching the Power On The machine takes approximately 5 seconds to warm up and to be ready to copy or print after s...

Page 65: ...bs Then make sure that the Data indicator is not blinking Important Do not switch the power off in the following situations If the power is switched off the processing data may be erased While data is being received While a job is being printed While a job is being copied While a job is being scanned While data is being imported from a computer When switching the power off wait 5 seconds after out...

Page 66: ...ark It means the cooling process is in progress The process takes up to about 30 to 60 minutes depending on the internal temperature of the machine Do not switch the main power off until the light of the Power Saver button goes off Switch the main power off first when unplugging the power cord Unplugging the power cord with the main power on may damage the hard disk and the memory or cause a machi...

Page 67: ...lly cut off the power circuit to prevent any leakage or fire from occurring The ground fault interrupter is normally ON upper position Check that the ground fault interrupter works properly at least once a month If you have any problems with the ground fault interrupter contact our Customer Support Center For information on how to check if the ground fault interrupter is working refer to the Safet...

Page 68: ...er 7 Press the main power switch to the position to switch on the main power 8 Close the machine front door 9 Press the power switch to switch on the power 10 Restart the computer For more information on setting items refer to Printer Environment Settings P 563 Using the Ethernet Interface The Ethernet interface of the machine supports the following three types z 1000BASE T z 100BASE TX z 10BASE T...

Page 69: ...onal is not installed Note To use the connector as 1000BASE T the Gigabit Ethernet optional is required z When the Secondary Ethernet optional is installed Note The Secondary Ethernet connector supports 1000BASE T only To use the standard Ethernet connector as 1000BASE T the Gigabit Ethernet optional is required 6 Press the main power switch to the position to switch on the main power 7 Close the ...

Page 70: ...ower Saver feature is exited The Sleep mode requires more time for the machine to exit and to be ready for use than the Low Power mode Note When the option is connected to the machine and operated as the following the Low Power mode is exited automatically without pressing the Power Saver button This automatic exiting is not available when the machine enters the Sleep mode To use the automatic exi...

Page 71: ... printing or Sample Set printing while the control panel remains lit off and the machine is in the Power Saver mode only the output device exits the Power Saver mode In this case the machine enters the Sleep mode 15 seconds later without following this setting by factory default 1 Press the Log In Out button 2 Enter the system administrator s user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard display...

Page 72: ... mode Note The default value for From Last Operation to Low Power Mode is 1 minute You cannot disable the Low Power mode From Last Operation to Sleep Mode Set the time to elapse from the last operation until the machine enters the Sleep mode Note The default value for From Last Operation to Sleep Mode is 1 minutes To enable the machine to enter the Low Power mode before the Sleep mode you must set...

Page 73: ...nded to lower the room temperature Note Selecting the Close button in the above screen forcibly closes the screen This however does not shut down the cooling phase and the machine remains inactive until the internal temperature declines to a predetermined temperature You must wait until the message Machine Cooling in Progress disappears in the upper left hand corner of the screen Important It is i...

Page 74: ...Folder List For information on the Folder List refer to Folder List P 626 You can change the blink pattern of the Data indicator For more information refer to Data Indicator P 456 3 Error indicator Blinks if a system error occurs This indicator lights up when a problem other than a system error occurs with the machine including paper jams and running out of paper If the Error indicator blinks cont...

Page 75: ...utton When the machine is not used for a while it enters the Power Saver mode to reduce power consumption When the Power Saver mode is active the Power Saver button lights up Press this button to enter or exit the Power Saver mode 11 Interrupt button Press this button to suspend a copy or print job in progress to have the machine process another job During the Interrupt mode the Interrupt button l...

Page 76: ...s of the control panel refer to Screen Button Settings P 425 Setting the Initial Screen You can change the screen displayed when the machine is turned on or the Power Saver mode is deactivated The Services Home screen is displayed by factory default 1 Press the Log In Out button 2 Enter the system administrator s user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed on the screen and select En...

Page 77: ...me For information on Auto Clear refer to Auto Clear P 421 1 Press the Log In Out button 2 Enter the system administrator s user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed on the screen and select Enter When a passcode is required select Next and enter the system administrator s passcode and select Enter Note The default user ID is 11111 The default passcode is x admin 3 Select Tools on ...

Page 78: ...rvices to the custom buttons you can switch to the services without returning to the Services Home screen Note By default Copy is assigned to Custom Button 1 and Review is assigned to Custom Button 3 No service is assigned to Custom Button 2 1 Press the Log In Out button 2 Enter the system administrator s user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed on the screen and select Enter When...

Page 79: ...display the previous screen or to display the next screen The layout of the buttons in this screen corresponds to the layout of those on the Services Home screen 7 Select Save Customizing the Services Home Screen You can customize the layout of services and buttons on the Services Home screen that is displayed when you press the Services Home button on the control panel For information on how to c...

Page 80: ...n contact our Customer Support Center z Language z Screen Brightness z Setup z Calibration z Lockout Printer Release Printer Note Lockout Printer Release Printer is not displayed by default To display this feature select Allow User to Lock Out in Printer Lockout under Tools System Settings Common Service Settings Machine Clock Timers and then assign the feature to a button on the Services Home Add...

Page 81: ...n Button Settings 5 Select Services Home and then select Change Settings Note Select to display the previous screen or to display the next screen 6 Select the position where you want to assign a service Note Select to display the previous screen or to display the next screen The layout of the buttons in this screen corresponds to the layout of those on the Services Home screen 7 Select a service y...

Page 82: ...and select Enter When a passcode is required select Next and enter the system administrator s passcode and select Enter Note The default user ID is 11111 The default passcode is x admin 3 Select Tools on the Services Home screen Note When the Services Home screen is not displayed on the touch screen press the Services Home button 4 Select System Settings Common Service Settings Screen Button Setti...

Page 83: ...ant to display on the Services Home screen Note Select to display the previous screen or to display the next screen You cannot assign the same feature to more than one button 8 Select Save 9 Select Save Adjusting Screen Brightness You can adjust the screen brightness of the screen on the Services Home screen 1 Select Screen Brightness on the Services Home screen 2 Press or to adjust the screen bri...

Page 84: ...User ID entry screen for entering the System Administration mode the Authentication mode or the Accounting mode When a user is authenticated the login information is displayed in this field Note You can also press the Log In Out button on the control panel to enter the Authentication mode To exit the Authentication mode press the Log In Out button on the control panel You can also select the login...

Page 85: ...fer to Network Scanning P 259 Stored Programming You can operate stored programs Stored Programming is a service that allows you to store settings that you expect to use frequently and call them with a single button operation For more information refer to Stored Programming P 329 Store Send Link After you scan documents the machine temporarily saves the scanned data and sends you e mail attached w...

Page 86: ...s P 354 Note An optional component is required to use this service For more information contact our Customer Support Center Additional Feature Buttons Allows you to set the additional features that are not related to jobs Language You can select the language to be displayed on the touch screen The setting here will be reset when the power is switched off and on Important When you select English on...

Page 87: ...n copies and prints deteriorates For more information refer to Executing Calibration P 682 Print Mode You can register a print mode and change its settings For more information refer to Print Mode P 629 Clean Fusing Unit You can clean the fusing unit when the image quality of print outcome can be improved For more information refer to Clean Fusing Unit P 725 ...

Page 88: ...nger touched the touch screen and release your finger Drag the touch screen from side to side to switch pages on the Services Home screen Drag the touch screen up and down to scroll on the list or thumbnail view Note During drag scrolling stops when you move your finger away from the touch screen Pages are not switched when dragging force is not enough You can scroll a list also by dragging the li...

Page 89: ... switch the page on the preview screen Double tap To tap the same position of the screen twice is called double tap You can double tap on the preview screen Double tap to enlarge a preview image Note You cannot reduce or enlarge the screen size by pinch in or pinch out pinch and move the screen with two fingers Preview screen when scanning Preview screen when scanning ...

Page 90: ...ription Entering alphabets and numerals To enter uppercase letters select Shift To return to the lowercase letters select Shift again Entering symbols Select More Characters Note Depending on the keyboard you can select a symbol from the pull up options displayed on the bottom left of the screen Entering a space Select Space Deleting characters Select Backspace to delete one character at a time Se...

Page 91: ...used with the machine precautions when handling paper and how to load paper in trays z Paper Types 92 z Loading Paper 104 z Loading Tab Paper Postcards Envelopes 112 z About Weight Switch Buttons 121 z Improving the Paper Feeding Performance 122 z Changing the Paper Settings 123 ...

Page 92: ... Moisture generated by water rain or vapor may cause the printed images to fade For more information contact our Customer Support Center Supported Paper Type Loadable Quantity Paper Feed Method The following describes the paper type that can be used with each tray loadable quantity and the paper type that can be used with automatic duplex print or can be output with the printed side facing down WA...

Page 93: ... 158 176 177 220 221 256 O O 257 300 X O 301 350 X X Uncoated Reload 52 63 X O 64 80 81 90 91 105 106 135 136 157 158 176 177 220 221 256 O O 257 300 X O 301 350 X X Coated 52 63 X X 64 80 81 90 91 105 106 135 136 157 158 176 177 220 221 256 O O 257 300 X O 301 350 X X Coated Reload 52 63 X X 64 80 81 90 91 105 106 135 136 157 158 176 177 220 221 256 O O 257 300 X O 301 350 X X Punched 52 63 X O 6...

Page 94: ...257 300 X O 301 350 X X Mat Coated 52 63 X X 64 80 81 90 91 105 106 135 136 157 158 176 177 220 221 256 O O 257 300 X O 301 350 X X Embossed 106 135 136 157 158 176 177 220 221 256 O O 257 300 X O 301 350 X X Precut Tab Embossed 106 135 136 157 158 176 177 220 221 256 O O 257 300 X O 301 350 X X Film 52 63 X X 64 80 81 90 91 105 106 135 136 157 158 176 177 220 221 256 O O 257 300 X O Tray 1 2 3 Tr...

Page 95: ...oated Cast Coated Transparency 72 220 gsm Ream Weight 61 9 189 1 kg Recycled 72 105 gsm Ream Weight 61 9 90 2 kg 301 350 X X Transfer Paper 129 176 X O O X Paper can be used Paper cannot be used Tray 1 2 3 Tray 5 Bypass Paper Type Basis Weight Selection Group Unit gsm 64 256 gsm Ream Weight 55 0 220 1 kg 52 300 gsm Ream Weight 44 7 257 9 kg ...

Page 96: ... 0 189 1 kg 52 350 gsm Ream Weight 44 7 300 9 kg 52 300 gsm Ream Weight 44 7 257 9 kg 64 220 gsm Ream Weight 55 0 189 1 kg Uncoated 52 63 X O O X 64 80 81 90 91 105 106 135 136 157 158 176 177 220 O O O O 221 256 257 300 X O O X 301 350 X O X X Uncoated Reload 52 63 X O O X 64 80 81 90 91 105 106 135 136 157 158 176 177 220 O O O X 221 256 257 300 X O O X 301 350 X O X X Coated 52 63 X X X X 64 80...

Page 97: ... X O X X Recycled 64 79 80 90 91 105 O O O O Transparency X O O X Labels 106 135 136 157 158 176 177 220 O O O X 221 256 257 300 X O O X 301 350 X O X X Precut Tab Embossed 64 80 81 90 91 105 X X X O Paper Type Basis Weight Selection Group Unit gsm Tray 6 HCF B1 Tray 6 7 High Capacity Feeder C3 DS Tray 6 HCF B1 S Tray T1 Inserter 64 220 gsm Ream Weight 55 0 189 1 kg 52 350 gsm Ream Weight 44 7 300...

Page 98: ...06 135 136 157 158 176 177 220 O O O X 221 256 257 300 X O O X 301 350 X O X X Mat Coated 52 63 X X X X 64 80 81 90 91 105 106 135 136 157 158 176 177 220 O O O X 221 256 257 300 X O O X 301 350 X O X X Paper Type Basis Weight Selection Group Unit gsm Tray 6 HCF B1 Tray 6 7 High Capacity Feeder C3 DS Tray 6 HCF B1 S Tray T1 Inserter 64 220 gsm Ream Weight 55 0 189 1 kg 52 350 gsm Ream Weight 44 7 ...

Page 99: ...on standard size paper you can preset the size on the machine That size then appears under Paper Size on the Tray 5 screen For more information on the settings refer to Tray 5 Paper Size Defaults P 433 Embossed 106 135 136 157 158 176 177 220 X O O O 221 256 257 300 X O O X 301 350 X O X X Tab Stock Embossed 106 135 136 157 158 176 177 220 X O O O 221 256 257 300 X O O X 301 350 X O X X Film 52 63...

Page 100: ... 98 0 to 330 2 mm in width and 148 0 to 488 0 mm in total length The paper length of 146 0 to 147 9 mm is also supported but the image quality and paper feed performance are not guaranteed Paper Tray Loadable Quantity Tray 1 2 3 570 sheets per tray 1 Tray 5 Bypass 250 sheets 1 Tray 6 z HCF B1 z HCF B1 S z High Capacity Feeder C3 DS upper tray 2 100 sheets per tray 1 Tray 7 z High Capacity Feeder C...

Page 101: ...lect the paper type setting for the paper loaded in a paper tray For more information refer to Changing the Paper Settings P 123 Paper Type Basis Weight Selection Group Unit gsm Uncoated 52 63 64 80 81 90 91 105 106 135 136 157 158 176 177 220 Uncoated Reload 52 63 64 80 81 90 91 105 106 135 136 157 158 176 177 220 Recycled 64 79 80 90 91 105 Coated 52 63 64 80 81 90 91 105 106 135 136 157 158 176...

Page 102: ... Unit gsm Paper Type Colotech 200 Uncoated Colotech Gloss Coated 170 Coated Colotech Silk Coated 170 Coated Paper Basis Weight Unit gsm Paper Type Colortech 250 Uncoated 350 Uncoated Colotech Gloss Coated 250 Coated Colotech Silk Coated 250 Coated Colotech Supergloss 250 Coated Nevia Matt Jin Dong 128 Coated 256 Coated Nevia Gloss Jin Dong 128 Coated 256 Coated XploreDigitalArtpaper Matt Jin Dong ...

Page 103: ...e to prevent bends or warping Please adhere to the following points when loading paper in a tray z Align the stack of paper neatly before loading it in a tray z Do not use paper that is folded creased or wrinkled z Do not use warped or curled paper z Do not load paper of mixed size together into a tray z Carefully fan transparencies and labels before use Otherwise paper jams may occur or multiple ...

Page 104: ...be selected in the automatic tray selection When the paper runs out during copying or printing select a tray containing the paper of the same size orientation type and weight and the machine continues copying or printing Auto Tray Switching feature For information about setting Paper Type Paper Weight Paper Tray Priority and setting the paper substitute feature refer to Paper Tray Settings P 429 Y...

Page 105: ...aper size 2 4 Load and align the edge of the paper against the left edge of the tray with the side to be copied or printed on facing down Important Do not load paper exceeding the maximum fill line MAX in the right figure It may cause paper jams or machine malfunctions Do not place any paper or objects in the empty space on the right side of trays It may cause paper jams or machine malfunctions 5 ...

Page 106: ...r size 3 Load paper with the side to be copied or printed on facing up and insert the paper lightly along the paper guide until it stops Important Do not load mixed paper types into the tray Do not load paper exceeding the maximum fill line MAX in the right figure It may cause paper jams or machine malfunctions Note When loading a postcard place its bottom edge along the machine When loading envel...

Page 107: ...opied or printed on facing up load and align the edge of the paper against the right edge of the tray Important Do not load paper exceeding the maximum fill line It may cause paper jams or machine malfunctions 4 Push the tray in gently until it stops Changing the Paper Size 1 Pull out the tray towards you until it stops Important While the machine is processing a job do not pull the tray out that ...

Page 108: ...ize 1 Insert the protrusion on the tray into a hole corresponding to the paper size on the top of the guide and tighten the screw 2 5 Unscrew the screw of the front guide and remove the guide from the tray 6 Insert the small protrusions at the bottom of the guide into holes corresponding to the paper size 1 Insert the protrusion on the tray into a hole corresponding to the paper size on the top of...

Page 109: ...eder C3 DS Tray 6 as an example The procedure is the same as for the HCF B1 S Tray 6 and the High Capacity Feeder C3 DS Tray 7 Important When you load non standard size paper whose length Y is 100 0 to 181 9 mm for the HCF B1 S or 98 0 to 181 9 mm for the High Capacity Feeder C3 DS make sure that the Post Card Kit is attached to the tray If the Post Card Kit is not attached a paper jam occurs When...

Page 110: ... the desired paper size 2 4 With the side to be copied or printed on facing up load the remaining paper and align the edges of the paper in the arrow direction 1 While pinching the left short side paper guide align the edge to the desired paper size 2 Important Do not load paper exceeding the maximum fill line It may cause paper jams or machine malfunctions If the number of sheets is 100 or less t...

Page 111: ...rs and cannot be used to load paper for copying Note Remove any paper remaining in Tray T1 Inserter and then load that paper on top of the newly loaded paper 1 Hold the center of the paper guides and slide them to the desired paper size 2 Load the paper neatly aligning all edges Important Do not load paper exceeding the maximum fill line It might cause paper jams or machine malfunctions ...

Page 112: ...o register the paper size For how to register refer to Paper Tray Settings P 429 Loading Tab Paper in Trays 1 to 3 The following describes how to load tab paper in Tray 1 as an example The procedure is the same as for Trays 2 and 3 Important The paper orientation that can be specified for Trays 1 to 3 is Portrait only For how to copy on non standard size paper refer to Paper Supply Selecting the P...

Page 113: ...side and short side paper guides lightly align the edges to the edges of the tab paper 6 Push the tray in gently until it stops Important When pushing the paper tray in do it slowly If the tray is pushed with too much force it might cause machine malfunctions Loading Tab Paper in Tray 5 Bypass 1 Open Tray 5 Bypass Note If necessary extend the extension flap The extension flap can be extended in tw...

Page 114: ...in the tray 3 With the side to be copied or printed on facing up and with the tab side to the left load approximately 100 to 500 sheets of paper in the tray and align the edges of the paper in the arrow direction 1 While pinching the long side paper guide align the edges to the desired paper size 2 4 Likewise load the remaining paper and align the edges of the paper in the arrow direction 1 While ...

Page 115: ...e is the same as for the HCF B1 S Tray 6 and the High Capacity Feeder C3 DS Tray 7 For how to load a postcard in Tray 5 Bypass refer to Loading Paper in Tray 5 Bypass P 106 Note Carefully fan the paper before loading it in a tray Otherwise paper jams may occur or multiple sheets may be fed to the machine simultaneously When using postcards you need to set the paper type for the paper tray to Postc...

Page 116: ...n the edges of the paper in the arrow direction 1 While pinching the long side paper guide align the edges to the desired paper size 2 Note The HCF Post Card Kit supports only the postcards 100 148 mm and 4 6 6 Likewise load the remaining paper in the tray and align the edges of the paper in the arrow direction 1 While pinching the left short side paper guide align the edges to the desired paper s...

Page 117: ...g envelope with the flap opening use the custom size setting The length X of 146 0 to 147 9 mm is also supported but the image quality and paper feed performance are not guaranteed When the envelope width is less than 182 mm be sure to attach the Post Card Kit to the HCF B1 S Tray 6 or the High Capacity Feeder C3 DS Trays 6 and 7 The following describes how to load envelopes in the High Capacity F...

Page 118: ... side of the machine When loading adhesive envelope place it with the flap closing When loading envelope with the flap closing and the flap placing to the front side of the machine note that the quality of the image printed on the trailing edge of the envelope may become poor 4 Likewise load the remaining envelopes in the tray and align the bottom edge of the envelopes in the arrow direction 1 Pin...

Page 119: ...st Card Kit to the tray 2 5 With the side to be copied or printed on facing up load approximately 10 to 30 envelopes in the tray and align the bottom edges not the flap side of the envelopes in the arrow direction when using the long format or the square format envelope 1 Pinch the long side paper guide and slide it to the desired paper size 2 Note When loading envelope with the flap opening place...

Page 120: ...e 10 sheets or less the guides apply more pressure to the envelopes It may cause distortion of the envelopes and may cause paper jams When loading envelopes neatly align all edges Also if the envelopes loaded are tipped reduce the number of envelopes loaded Position the guides correctly to match the envelope size Otherwise the envelope may not be fed properly and cause paper jams 7 Push the tray i...

Page 121: ... the HCF B1 S Tray 6 and the High Capacity Feeder C3 DS Tray 7 Important If 256 gsm or heavier paper is loaded in the tray be sure to switch the button to the heavier weight group Otherwise paper jams or malfunctions may occur 1 Pull out the tray towards you until it stops Important While the machine is processing a job do not pull the tray out that the job uses 2 Slide the switches to the appropr...

Page 122: ... paper to be fed improperly resulting in paper jams 1 Pull out the tray towards you until it stops Important While the machine is processing a job do not pull out the tray that the job uses 2 Slide the switch on top of the long side paper guide to the right until it stops Note To return the switch to its original position slide it to the left until it stops 3 If the paper feeding performance is no...

Page 123: ...e paper type setting without entering to the System Administration mode on the Setup screen which is displayed by selecting Setup in the Services Home screen if you configure the settings in advance For more information refer to Paper Tray Attributes on Setup Screen P 433 1 Press the Log In Out button 2 Enter the system administrator s user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed on t...

Page 124: ...djustment and Adjust Fold Position respectively Note When you specify postcard for the Paper Type of a paper tray specify postcard for the Paper Size as well If you specify another paper size the job will be canceled For information on Paper Size Paper Type Paper Weight and Paper Color refer to Paper Tray Attributes P 431 For information on Adjust Paper Curl refer to Adjust Paper Curl P 717 For in...

Page 125: ...ibes the basic operation and features for the Copy service z Copying Procedure 126 z Operations during Copying 132 z Simple Copy 135 z Copy 140 z Image Quality 153 z Layout Adjustment 160 z Output Format 174 z Job Assembly 205 ...

Page 126: ...ze on the Original Size screen For information on document sizes that can be detected automatically and how to enter a non standard document size refer to Original Size Specifying the Scan Size for the Document P 165 The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on Paper Size Settings in the System Administration mode For information on paper size settings refer to Paper Si...

Page 127: ...ndard size documents enter the size on the Original Size screen Forinformationon the documentsizesthatcan bedetectedautomaticallyandhowto enter anon standarddocumentsize refer to Original Size Specifying the Scan Size for the Document P 165 The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on Paper Size Settings in the System Administration mode For information on the paper siz...

Page 128: ...e Copy screen Note The features displayed on the screen depend on the configuration of your machine When the Authentication or Accounting feature is enabled a user ID and passcode may be required Ask your system administrator for the user ID and passcode 1 Press the Services Home button 2 Select Copy 3 If the previous settings still remain press the Clear All button 4 Select each tab and configure...

Page 129: ...art button Important If the document has been loaded in the document feeder do not hold down the document while it is being conveyed Copies cannot be made if a copy protection code is detected Note If a problem occurs an error message appears on the touch screen Follow the instructions of the message to solve the problem You can set the next job during copying If you have more documents If you hav...

Page 130: ... assumes that there are no more documents You can change the number of copies by selecting Change Quantity that is displayed after selecting Delete 3 Load the next document 4 Press the Start button If you have more documents repeat steps 3 and 4 5 When all documents have been scanned select Last Original Step 5 Confirming the Copy Job in Job Status If copies are not output after you start the copy...

Page 131: ...opy 4 2 Confirm the job status Note Select to return to the previous screen or to move to the next screen The list can be scrolled by drag or flick operation For information on how to drag or flick refer to Touch Screen P 88 ...

Page 132: ... Copy Job 132 Changing the Number of Copies 133 Interrupting the Copy Job 134 Stopping the Copy Job 1 Press either the Stop button on the control panel or Delete on the touch screen 2 Select Delete If Delete does not appear on the screen 1 Press the Job Status button 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Stop button Job Status button ...

Page 133: ... 3 Select Delete 4 Select Delete Changing the Number of Copies To change the number of copy sets during scanning or copying use the following procedure 1 Press either the Stop button on the control panel or Delete on the touch screen 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Stop button ...

Page 134: ...machine does not accept another job while it is scanning the documents or when Next Original has been selected Even when the Interrupt button is pressed the machine may not accept another copy job if 10 sets or less are being copied using the document glass 1 Press the Interrupt button The Interrupt button lights up to indicate that the machine is in the Interrupt mode 2 Load a document and set fe...

Page 135: ...lecting the Color for Copying 137 Lighten Darken Adjusting the Copy Density 138 2 Pages per Side Copying Two Pages onto One Sheet 138 1 Staple 139 1 Select Simple Copy on the Services Home screen 2 Select a feature on the Simple Copy screen Paper Supply Selecting the Paper for Copying This feature allows you to select the paper tray in which the paper is loaded for copying Note When you select a t...

Page 136: ...g the Remaining Amount of Paper in a Tray The icons displayed in the indication areas for each tray allows you to check the remaining amount of paper loaded in the tray Reduce Enlarge Making Enlarged Reduced Copies This feature allows you to select a copy ratio to enlarge or reduce the size of copies 1 Select Reduce Enlarge 2 Select a copy ratio Indicates that the remaining amount of paper is 25 t...

Page 137: ... sided documents on one side or both sides of paper 1 Select any option 1 J 1 Sided Makes a copy of a 1 sided document on one side of the paper 1 J 2 Sided Makes a copy of a 1 sided document on both sides of the paper 2 J 2 Sided Makes a copy of a 2 sided document on both sides of the paper Auto Detect Color Black White Selecting the Color for Copying This feature allows you to select a color mode...

Page 138: ...Copying Two Pages onto One Sheet This feature allows you to copy two pages of a document together onto one side of a single sheet of paper When you select 2 Pages per Side Auto is automatically selected in Reduce Enlarge The machine automatically sets the copy ratio and makes copies of the images so that they fit on the selected paper Note When you deselect Auto in Reduce Enlarge when you select a...

Page 139: ...nisher D5 2 to 100 sheets z Paper types that can be stapled Uncoated Uncoated Reload Coated Coated Reload Recycled Punched Embossed Cast Coated Mat Coated Tab Stock Precut Tab Embossed Finisher D4 Finisher D4 with Booklet Finisher D5 cuts the staple nails depending on the number of sheets The stapled nails may be bent depending on the type of paper used Note This feature requires an optional compo...

Page 140: ...py Density 152 You can customize the layout of the features displayed on the Copy screen For more information refer to Copy Tab Features Allocation P 457 1 Select Copy on the Services Home screen 2 Select a feature on the Copy screen Reduce Enlarge Making Enlarged Reduced Copies This feature allows you to select a copy ratio to enlarge or reduce the size of copies 1 Specify a copy ratio Note You c...

Page 141: ...y ratio or specify a value Variable Specify a ratio in the range from 25 to 400 in 1 increments To specify a value use the numeric keypad or and Specifying 100 allows you to make copies at the same image size as the original document When you make enlarged reduced copies from standard sized documents on standard sized paper the following copy ratios will be applied Load a document in landscape ori...

Page 142: ...nto the paper Important If you select Slight Reduction Improves Fit and you do not want to erase the edges of the document set the amount of edge erase to 0 mm Note that if the amount is set to 0 mm the edges of the copied document may get dirty You can set Edge Erase on the Layout Adjustment screen For more information refer to Edge Erase Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document P 166 Whe...

Page 143: ...The values entered in Original Size and Copy Size are used to calculate ratios and do not reflect a scan size for the document or the paper size Be sure to specify a scan size for the document Also select a paper tray if necessary For information on how to specify a scan size for the document refer to Original Size Specifying the Scan Size for the Document P 165 Forinformationon howtoselectapapert...

Page 144: ...h Auto under Reduce Enlarge Trays 2nd to 5th buttons Allows you to directly select the desired tray You can change the paper tray associated with each button on the Copy screen For information on the settings refer to Paper Supply Button 2 5 P 458 More Displays the Paper Supply screen For information on the settings on the Paper Supply screen refer to Paper Supply Screen P 145 Checking the Remaini...

Page 145: ...isplays paper types Paper Weight Displays paper weights For information on the settings refer to Paper Tray Settings P 429 Tray 5 Screen Set the paper loaded in Tray 5 If you want to use paper that cannot be loaded in Trays 1 to 3 Tray 6 optional or Tray 7 optional use Tray 5 The Tray 5 screen appears when you load paper For information on paper that can be loaded in Tray 5 refer to Paper Types P ...

Page 146: ...reen The list can be scrolled by drag or flick operation For information on how to drag or flick refer to Touch Screen P 88 2 Select a paper type paper weight and adjustment type Paper Type Paper Weight Select a paper type and paper weight Adjust Paper Curl For information on Adjust Paper Curl refer to Changing the Paper Settings P 123 Alignment Adjustment For information on Alignment Adjustment r...

Page 147: ... increments Important For X direction the range of 146 to 147 mm is also supported but the image quality and paper feed performance are not guaranteed If the X width of non standard size paper is less than 146mm documents may not be copied properly 1 Enter a paper size using and or the numeric keypad 2 Select a paper type ...

Page 148: ... area is too small The colors are too light In that case change a level from the five levels which is used for the machine to recognize color For more information refer to Output Color Recognition P 435 Color Copies in full color Black White Copies in black and white regardless of the colors in the original document Dual Color Red Black Copies color documents using two colors Youcanchangethetwocol...

Page 149: ...or Displays the Source Color screen on which you can select one or more colors from your document to define them as source colors Refer to Source Color Screen P 149 z Target Area Color Displays the Target Area Color screen on which you can select the target color to be used in place of the selected source colors Refer to Target Area Color Screen P 150 z Non target Area Color Displays the Non targe...

Page 150: ...o select one or more source colors from six preset options Target Area Color Screen This screen allows you to select the target color to be used in place of the source colors specified in Source Color You can select one color from seven preset and six custom options For information on how to set custom colors refer to Custom Colors P 467 1 Select Dual Color 2 Select Target Area Color ...

Page 151: ...n on how to set custom colors refer to Custom Colors P 467 1 Select Dual Color 2 Select Non target Area Color 3 Select any color Output Color Color Screen This screen allows you to specify the color to be used for single color copying regardless of the colors in the original document You can select one color from six preset and six custom options for Single Color For information on how to set cust...

Page 152: ...t screen For more information refer to Copy Output Specifying Finishing Options P 198 Pages per Side Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet This feature is the same as Pages per Side on the Output Format screen For more information refer to Pages per Side Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet P 180 Lighten Darken Adjusting the Copy Density This feature allows you to select a copy density level from...

Page 153: ... Quality screen Note If the color reproduction is unsatisfactory perform calibration For information on calibration refer to Executing Calibration P 682 Original Type Selecting the Document Type This feature allows you to select the type of documents such as text and photos By selecting a document type you can make copies at optimum image quality 1 Select Original Type 2 Select any option Auto Aut...

Page 154: ...ion is suitable for graphs and illustrations z Normal Text Select this option for printed documents or for documents written with ink z Light Text Select this option for text that requires enhancement such as handwritten pencil text z Text on See Through Paper Select this option to reduce blurs of tracing paper documents or to suppress background shadows of lightweight documents Text on See Throug...

Page 155: ...pper cell on the bar makes the contours of images sharper and selecting a lower cell makes softer Saturation Selecting an upper cell on the bar makes colors brighter and selecting a lower cell makes less bright Image Enhancement Erasing the Background Color of Documents Adjusting Contrast This feature allows you to suppress the background color of documents such as newspaper and colored paper You ...

Page 156: ...rker In contrast selecting a lower cell on the bar makes the difference between light and dark areas smaller Color Effects Selecting an Image Quality If you set this feature the Image Enhancement Image Options Color Shift and Color Balance settings are automatically adjusted and copies are made at the specified quality Important When the Color Effects feature is used Auto Contrast is not available...

Page 157: ... the density level for each toner color to fine tune the color balance such as a reddish or bluish tint while the Lighten Darken feature adjusts the overall density level of the four colors Note If Color Balance is set concurrently with Color Effects the setting made in Color Effects will be cleared 1 Select Color Balance 2 Select any option Normal Always copies a document with the density balance...

Page 158: ...ecting a button on the screen moves the Original Color slider to adjust the tone of the colors For example when the Original Color slider is moved to the left the Y yellow cell on the Original Color slider becomes closer to the R red cell on the Copy Color slider and thus a yellow fruit appears more reddish and riper looking At the same time the tone of all the other colors changes The red color a...

Page 159: ...Image Quality 159 Copy 4 2 Select a button to adjust the color tone ...

Page 160: ...ment 165 Mixed Size Originals Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously 165 Edge Erase Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document 166 Image Shift Adjusting the Image Position 168 Invert Image Making Reversed Copies of Images 171 Original Orientation Specifying the Orientation of Loaded Documents 171 Image Rotation Changing the Orientation of Images 172 1 Select Copy on the Services Ho...

Page 161: ... This option is displayed when you select 2 J 2 Sided or 2 J 1 Sided z Head to Head Select this option when the front and back sides of the document are in the same orientation z Head to Toe Select this option when the front and back sides of the document are in opposite orientations Copies This option is displayed when you select 1 J 2 Sided or 2 J 2 Sided z Head to Head Select this option when y...

Page 162: ... Copying Copying Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets This feature allows you to copy facing pages of a document on separate sheets of paper in page order This is useful when you need to make separate copies of facing pages of a bound document such as a booklet Note You cannot use the document feeder with this feature A non standard size document or undetectable size document may not be separated int...

Page 163: ...page only You can select this option when Top Page then Bottom is selected Binding Edge Erase Erases the shadow from the center section of the document You can set the binding erase width in the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments 2 Sided Book Copying Making 2 Sided Copies of Facing Pages This feature allows you to assign pages when making copies of facing pages in a bound document such as a ...

Page 164: ...ow from the center section of the document You can set the binding erase width in the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments Starting Ending Page Screen This screen allows you to set the starting and ending pages to be copied 1 Set Starting Page and Ending Page Starting Page z Left Page Right Page You can select these options when Left Page then Right or Right Page then Left is selected z Top Pa...

Page 165: ...s P 466 Variable Size Enter the desired scan size when scanning a non standard size document or when making copies at a size different from the original document size You can specify a value in the range from 15 to 432 mm for the width X and a value in the range from 15 to 297 mm for the length Y in 1 mm increments To help you specify values use the scales attached on the upper and left edges of t...

Page 166: ...ent Note The Original Orientation setting is based on the orientation of the first page of a document Load the second and subsequent pages of the document based on this setting If the Original Orientation setting differs from the actual document orientation the machine may not detect the top of the document correctly z Upright Images Select this option when placing the top edge of the document aga...

Page 167: ... for the top and bottom and left and right edges All Edges Erases the shadows of the four edges of a document as well as the shadow in the center of the document if it is a bound document or a booklet You can specify values for All Edges and Center individually Individual Edges Erases the shadows of the top bottom left and right edges of a document as well as the shadow in the center of the docume...

Page 168: ... option when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the document glass or document feeder z Sideways Images Select this option when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or document feeder Always select Sideways Images when the top of the document is placed facing the left side horizontal text 2 Sided Original Side 2 You can select t...

Page 169: ...s check box when you want the positioning of Side 2 to match the positioning of Side 1 Original Orientation Allows you to specify the orientation of the document so that the machine can identify the top of the document Note If the Original Orientation setting differs from the actual document orientation the machine may not detect the top of the document correctly z Upright Images Select this optio...

Page 170: ...aper You can select from 8 shift directions Specify the amounts of the top and bottom and left and right margins in the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments Margin Shift Allows you to specify the amounts of the top and bottom and left and right margins in the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments Image Shift Side 2 Screen This screen allows you to set the image shift for Side 2 1 Select any...

Page 171: ... is set to Black White or Single Color the black color on the document is inverted to white and the white color to black When Output Color is set to Color the colors are inverted to their complementary colors When Negative Image and Edge Erase are set simultaneously the edge erase area turns to white 1 Select Invert Image 2 Select any option Mirror Image Reverses the left and right sides of the do...

Page 172: ...tation Changing the Orientation of Images If the orientation of the paper currently loaded in the tray differs from that of the document loaded the machine automatically rotates the document image so that the orientation of the image matches that of the paper You can also select a reference position for image rotation if documents are of mixed orientations This feature is available only when you m...

Page 173: ...eference position for rotation 1 Select any option Staple Position This option is displayed when the finisher is installed If documents are of mixed orientations the images will be rotated to match the stapling edge specified in the settings of the Staple feature Portrait Original Left Edge If documents are of mixed orientations the images will be rotated so that the top edge of landscape document...

Page 174: ...ut Specifying Face Up or Down 193 Folding Outputting Bi Folded Tri Folded Paper 194 Preset Repeat Image Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet 196 Transparency Options Inserting Blank Sheets between Transparencies 197 Copy Output Specifying Finishing Options 198 ID Card Copy Copying Both Sides of an ID Card 204 1 Select Copy on the Services Home screen 2 Select a feature on the Output Format scr...

Page 175: ...lected in Paper Supply a tray specified in Auto Paper Off is automatically selected Change the setting if necessary For information on Auto Paper Off refer to Copy Control P 463 An optional component is required For more information contact our Customer Support Center 1 Specify the orientation of the document in Original Orientation on the Layout Adjustment screen 2 Select Booklet Creation on the ...

Page 176: ...age Positioning This option is displayed if you select Create Left Top Bound Booklet or Create Right Bound Booklet Auto Image Positioning is a feature that adjusts the image position Image shifting may occur for example when you print and create booklets that contain a large number of pages due to their thicknesses This feature adjusts images so that the printing position from the edge of each pag...

Page 177: ...e specify the dividing number of sheets in the range from 1 to 16 1 Select On 2 Specify the number of sheets in each subset using and or the numeric keypad Booklet Creation Fold Staple Screen When the C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker optional or Booklet Finisher D4 optional is installed Fold Only and Fold Staple become available 1 Select any option Off No finishing is carried out Fold Only This opti...

Page 178: ...osite of the booklet spine in order to finish the edge neatly Book Pressing is a feature that presses the spine of a booklet to flatten the spine Important If outputs are not stapled or if a finished booklet is four pages or less paper may be jammed or wrinkled resulting in a poor shaped spine 1 Select any option Trimming z Off Does not trim the fore edge of booklets z On Trims the fore edge of bo...

Page 179: ...back covers of copies Important If you use tab stock paper select Face Down in Face Up Down Output on the Output Format screen 1 Select Covers 2 Select any option Front Cover Attaches a front cover to the copies z Off No front cover is attached z Blank Cover Blank sheets of paper are attached as front covers z Print on Side 1 The first page of the document is copied on the front side of the front ...

Page 180: ...the number of blank sheets to be used as front covers Back Cover Quantity This option is displayed when you select Blank Cover in Back Cover Specify the number of blank sheets to be used as back covers Pages per Side Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet This feature allows you to copy two four or eight pages of a document together onto a single sheet of paper When you set Pages per Side Auto is a...

Page 181: ...when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the document glass or document feeder z Sideways Images Select this option when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or document feeder Always select Sideways Images when the top of the document is placed facing the left side horizontal text Poster Making Enlarged Copies Spread over Multip...

Page 182: ...sed Note When you use the bypass tray select Bypass on the Paper Supply screen When Enlargement is Selected This screen allows you to specify a different ratio for the width and length 1 Use and to specify the copy ratios for the width and length Width X Length Y Allows you to specify the copy ratios for the width and length in the range from 100 to 400 in 1 increments Lock X Y Allows you to make ...

Page 183: ...g if necessary For information on Auto Paper Off refer to Auto Paper Off P 464 1 Select Repeat Image 2 Select any option Off Disables this feature Auto Repeat Automatically determines the number of the repeated copies according to the document size paper size and copy ratio and then repeatedly copies the document image onto the paper Note Copies cannot be made when the document image is larger tha...

Page 184: ...et an annotation is added to each copy image If a layout template is specified in Apply Layout Template to Copy Print Jobs under Force Annotation in the System Administration mode the comment date and page number specified here are overlapped with the text on the layout template when printed For information on Force Annotation refer to Force Annotation P 443 1 Select Annotations 2 Select any optio...

Page 185: ...the Apply Comment To screen You can select whether to add a comment onto the first copy page only or onto each copy page Position Displays the Comment Position screen You can select a comment position from nine options For side 2 of copy sheets you can select Same as Side 1 or Mirror Side 1 Format Style Displays the Comment Format Style screen You can select a comment size from three options or ca...

Page 186: ...tion from six options For side 2 of copy sheets you can select Same as Side 1 or Mirror Side 1 Font Size Displays the Date Font Size screen You can select a date size from three options or can directly specify a size in the range from 6 to 24 points in 1 point increments Page Numbers Screen This screen allows you to select a page number style and its position 1 Select any option Off No page number...

Page 187: ... and the text Page before each page number When you select Page 1 N Page 2 N the value specified in Total Page N is used z Total Pages N Displays the Total Pages N screen Auto Automatically calculates the total number of pages Enter Number Allows you to specify the total number of pages in the range from 1 to 9999 Apply To Displays the Apply Page Numbers To screen Refer to Apply Page Numbers To Sc...

Page 188: ...ou to specify the start and end pages to add page numbers in the range from 1 to 9999 Note Use and or the numeric keypad to enter the start and end page numbers Include Covers Separators This option is available when you select All Pages Select this check box to include covers and separators Starting Number Allows you to specify a starting page number to add page numbers in the range from 1 to 999...

Page 189: ...Font Size screen You can select a prefix and page number size from three options or can directly specify a size in the range from 6 to 24 points in 1 point increments Apply Bates Stamp To Screen This screen allows you to specify a page range to add prefix text and page numbers 1 Select any option All Pages Adds prefix text and page numbers to all pages Starting Page Number Allows you to specify th...

Page 190: ...t a sequential control number in the background of each copy page If you set 1 as the starting number 1 is printed on each page of the first copy set and 2 is printed on each page of the second set To prevent for instance the duplication of confidential documents that are to be distributed at a conference you can use this feature to add sequential numbers to the copies and associate the numbers wi...

Page 191: ...sers with the Authentication and Accounting feature You can see if a user is authenticated by checking that the Log In Out button lights up Original Orientation Allows you to specify the orientation of the document so that the machine can identify the top of the document Note If the Original Orientation setting differs from the actual document orientation the machine may not detect the top of the ...

Page 192: ...termark Effect the text embedded in the background of the copy is printed as outline text You can specify the size density and other settings for the text to be printed with Watermark in the System Administration mode For more information refer to Watermark P 441 Tab Margin Shift Copying on Tab Stock Paper This feature allows you to adjust the position of your document image to copy the image onto...

Page 193: ...hat it is correctly copied onto the tab area Only the shifted image is copied which means that the rest of the image on the document is not copied Shift All Copies the whole image of the document onto tab stock paper Specify a value in Shift Value to shift the position of the image located on the edge of the document so that the image can be copied onto the tab area Shift Value Allows you to speci...

Page 194: ...ystem Administration mode Folding Outputting Bi Folded Tri Folded Paper This feature allows you to fold copies in half or in three When the C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker optional or the Booklet Finisher D4 optional is installed Single Fold is available When the D4 D5 Folder Unit optional is installed Z Fold and C Fold are also available Note The supported paper orientation is only Select the tray...

Page 195: ...s so that the image is printed outside after you select Z Fold C Fold or Single Fold Trimming When the Square Fold Trimmer Module optional is installed this option is displayed if you select Single Fold You can select whether to trim the fore edge of booklets Refer to Trimming Screen P 314 Trimming Screen When the Square Fold Trimmer Module optional is installed Trimming becomes available if you s...

Page 196: ...im Margin in the System Administration mode For more information refer to Default Trim Margin P 465 In rare cases delivered outputs may contain trim scraps Preset Repeat Image Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet This feature allows you to repeatedly copy one original onto equally divided areas according to the specified number of copies You can select the number of the times the original is c...

Page 197: ...for handouts Important Using transparency sheets for color with white border may cause a malfunction or paper jam Note When loading A4 size transparencies on Tray 5 Bypass we recommend that you load them in portrait orientation Load transparency sheets in a tray in the same orientation as the paper to be used for handouts and separators 1 Select Transparency Options 2 Select any option Off Does no...

Page 198: ...parators and handouts Select More to display the Paper Supply Separator Handout screen on which you can select a tray Note For Separator Handout select one of the paper trays Auto Paper Select feature is not available The paper tray that you selected for Transparency Tray cannot be selected for Separator Handout at the same time Handout Tray Allows you to select the paper tray to be used for the h...

Page 199: ... of copies and sorts sheets by page Uncollated with Separators The machine outputs copies with inserting blank sheets as a separator and sorts sheets by page Separator Tray When you select Uncollated with Separators select the paper tray to be used for the separators Staple Specify the position for stapling The C3 Finisher and the C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker are capable of stapling 2 50 sheets ...

Page 200: ... glass or document feeder z Sideways Images Select this option when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or document feeder Always select Sideways Images when the top of the document is placed facing the left side horizontal text Z Fold Half Sheet When the D4 D5 Folder Unit optional is installed the machine folds the output copies in Z fold Z fold can be...

Page 201: ...ut samples of specified portions You can specify up to three portions for each of the sets you want to confirm during sorting and the pages you want to confirm during stacking Samples are output to the output tray at the top of stacker trays Offset Stacking screen Allows you to select offset options The offset is a function for slightly offsetting and outputting each paper stack to allow you to di...

Page 202: ...ble when the Finisher D4 optional the Booklet Finisher D4 optional or the Finisher D5 optional is installed 4 Staple 4 Top 4 Right A4 Letter 8 5 x 11 Report Report Report 1 Staple 1 Top Right 2 Staples 2 Top 2 Right A4 B5 8 x 10 8 5 x 11 16K A3 A4 B4 8 5 x 11 8 5 x 13 8 5 x 14 11 x 17 8K 1 Left Center 1 Top Center 1 Right Center A4 B5 8 x 10 8 5 x 11 16K A4 A3 B4 8 5 x 11 8 5 x 13 8 5 x 14 11 x 17...

Page 203: ...sher with Booklet Maker optional This feature is available when the Punch Unit 2 4H CD1 optional or the Punch Unit US 2 3H CD1 optional is installed z Finisher D4 optional Booklet Finisher D4 optional Finisher D5 optional The 3 hole punch is optional 2 holes 3 holes 4 holes 4 Staples 4 Top 4 Right A4 Letter 8 5 x 11 Report Report Report 2 Holes Left 2 Holes Top 2 Holes Right A4 B5 7 25 x 10 5 8 x ...

Page 204: ... the image are missing slightly move the card inward on the document glass so that the whole image can be scanned When the reduced size is specified to copy an ID card the machine may copy the ID card in a different orientation from the original orientation depending on the magnification ratio specified For information on the copy magnification ratio for ID Card Copy refer to ID Card Copy Reduce E...

Page 205: ...g Calling a Stored Program for Build Job 213 1 Select Copy on the Services Home screen 2 Select a feature on the Job Assembly screen Note Select to return to the previous screen or to move to the next screen Drag or flick the screen vertically to switch the screen to be displayed For information on how to drag or flick refer to Touch Screen P 88 Build Job Processing Documents Scanned with Differen...

Page 206: ...ion Creating a Bound Booklet P 175 Covers Important The machine does not copy on a cover when using the Build Job feature For more information refer to Covers Attaching Covers to Copies P 179 Annotations For more information refer to Annotations Adding a Comment a Date Page Numbers to Copies P 184 Segment Separators For more information refer to Segment Separators Screen P 208 Watermark For more i...

Page 207: ...4 Delete Clears the document data stored by the Build Job feature and cancels the job Note You can also press the C Clear or Clear All button on the control panel to perform the same operation While the machine is scanning the loaded document Delete is displayed Select Delete to pause scanning Select Start on the touch screen or press the Start button on the control panel to resume scanning Last O...

Page 208: ...ts 1 Sided Side 1 Only A first page of the loaded documents is copied on the front side of a separator and the rest of the pages are copied on the paper other than a separator When Pages per Side is set the number of pages 2 pages 4 pages or 8 pages that you selected to copy onto one side of a single sheet starting from the first page of the loaded documents are copied onto the front page of a sep...

Page 209: ...ple sheet documents is copied onto another separator Segment Separator Tray Allows you to select the tray which is loaded with paper to be used as a separator When Bypass is selected the Tray 5 screen is displayed Separator Quantity This option is available when you select Blank Separators You can specify the number of separators in the range from 1 to 99 Sample Job Checking the Finished Output of...

Page 210: ...lete The remaining copies are canceled Start The remaining copies are made Note You can also press the Start button on the control panel to perform the same operation Combine Original Sets Adding Originals Use this feature when you copy a document that has too many pages to be loaded in the document feeder at one time or when you scan each document page using the document glass and have the machin...

Page 211: ...s option when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or document feeder Always select Sideways Images when the top of the document is placed facing the left side horizontal text Copy Screen When Combine Original Sets is in Progress The Copy screen is displayed when copying starts Delete Clears the document data stored with the Combine Original Sets feature...

Page 212: ...tion Off No area is deleted Delete Outside Deletes the outside of the selected area Delete Inside Deletes the inside of the selected area Area Settings Displays the Delete Outside Delete Inside Area 1 Area 2 or Area 3 screen You can specify up to three areas Refer to Delete Outside Delete Inside Area 1 Area 2 or Area 3 Screen P 213 Originals When the original document is a 2 sided document specify...

Page 213: ... width X and the length Y in 1 mm increments Note Specify the 2 coordinates from the top right corner of the document When specifying multiple areas the specified areas can overlap each other When Reduce Enlarge is set the specified area will be reduced or enlarged accordingly 1 Select Area 1 Area 2 or Area 3 2 Select the text box for X1 and enter the value for X1 using the numeric keypad 3 Select...

Page 214: ...4 Copy 214 Copy 4 ...

Page 215: ...settings refer to Scanner Environment Settings P 581 Note WSD stands for Web Services on Devices z Scanning Procedure 216 z Operations during Scanning 224 z E mail 231 z Network Scanning 259 z Scan to PC 261 z Store to Folder 271 z Store to USB 273 z Store Send Link 279 z Store to WSD 282 z Advanced Settings 285 z Layout Adjustment 289 z E mail Options Filing Options 297 ...

Page 216: ...r the size on the Original Size screen For information on document sizes that can be detected automatically and how to enter a non standard document size refer to Original Size Specifying a Scan Size P 291 The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on Paper Size Settings in the System Administration mode For information on paper size settings refer to Paper Size Settings...

Page 217: ...cument glass automatically detects standard size documents For non standard size documents enter the size on the Original Size screen For information on document sizes that can be detected automatically and how to enter a non standard document size refer to Original Size Specifying a Scan Size P 291 The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on Paper Size Settings in the...

Page 218: ...emplate created on CentreWare Internet Services When Scan to My Folder is enabled and the Remote Access feature is available the scanned data can be transferred to a different destination according to an authenticated user For information on how to create a job template refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services Important To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services users nee...

Page 219: ... describes how to store scanned data into a folder as an example 1 Press the Services Home button Scan Service File Format can be Selected When File Format PDF Docu Works XPS 1 TIFF JPEG BMP PNG MS Office E mail Using the control panel when scanning O 2 O 3 O O O X X O Scan to PC O 2 O 3 O O O X X O Store to USB O 2 O 3 O O O X X O Store Send Link O 2 O 3 O O O X X O Store to Folder Using CentreWa...

Page 220: ...dvanced Settings P 285 Layout Adjustment P 289 E mail Options Filing Options P 297 When you use another Scan service Store to Folder is replaced with E mail Network Scanning Scan to PC Store to USB Store Send Link or Store to WSD Note WSD stands for Web Services on Devices The following shows the reference section for each service E mail P 231 Scan to PC P 261 Store to USB P 273 Store Send Link P ...

Page 221: ...ingle set of data Up to 999 pages can be stored Note If the number of pages scanned by the machine exceeds the maximum the machine stops scanning Follow the message displayed on the screen and either abort the operation or save the already scanned data as a single set of data Forinformationon howtosetthemaximumnumberofpagesstoredforascandocument referto MaximumStoredPages P 503 2 While documents a...

Page 222: ...isplayed For information on how to drag or flick refer to Touch Screen P 88 From the drop down menu you can select Scan Jobs and display the desired job Step 5 Saving the Scanned Data When you used the Store to Folder service you can use the following methods to import the file stored in a folder of the machine to your computer Import using an application Use Network Scanner Driver Refer to Import...

Page 223: ...Scanning Procedure 223 Scan 5 Import using CentreWare Internet Services Use CentreWare Internet Services Refer to Importing Using CentreWare Internet Services P 397 ...

Page 224: ... during a Scan Job 225 Changing Scan Settings 229 Stopping the Scan Job To cancel scanning a document use the following procedure 1 Press either the Stop button on the control panel or Delete on the touch screen 2 Select Delete If Delete does not appear on the screen 1 Press the Job Status button 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Stop button 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Job Status button ...

Page 225: ...ices 1 When a document starts to be read with Preview is checked on a Scan screen the screen below is displayed After the document is read select Preview A preview screen is displayed and the first page of the lastly read document is displayed Note When this screen or the preview screen is displayed and the time of Auto Clear lapsed without any operation the read document is automatically sent For...

Page 226: ...r to Touch Screen P 88 Entire view An entire preview image is displayed In the entire view the page switching buttons and thumbnailed bar are available Feature Operation Switching pages on the preview area Drag or flick the preview area up and down Displaying the entire view Tap a thumbnail Preview area Preview area Previous page Next page Information area Page switching buttons Thumbnailed bar ...

Page 227: ...ion Displayed when PDF DocuWorks or XPS is set for File Format when Auto Upright Orientation is set for Searchable Page Orientation and when Searchable is set for Searchable Text Note XPS stands for XML Paper Specifications For information on how to set Searchable Page Orientation refer to Searchable Page Orientation P 505 Feature Operation Switching pages z Drag or flick the preview area side to ...

Page 228: ...ges Drag or flick the preview area side to side Note Drag or flick the preview area except for the slider and thumbnailed bar After switching the page the image is displayed in the entire view Changing the ratio of the image size Double tap a preview image or drag the slider Switching the page switching buttons and thumbnailed bar Tap the preview area Note Drag or flick the preview area except for...

Page 229: ...the step 1 Note When Store to Folder or Store to USB is selected selecting Save Last Original saves a job When E mail Store Send Link or Scan to PC is selected selecting Send Last Original sends a job Changing Scan Settings You can change scan settings while scanning the document Note For Store to WSD you cannot change scan settings while scanning the document WSD stands for Web Services on Device...

Page 230: ... Scan Density and Image Sharpness P 286 Original Orientation Specifying the Orientation of the Loaded Documents P 296 2 Sided Scanning Scanning Both Sides of a Document P 290 Original Size Specifying a Scan Size P 291 4 Press the Start button ...

Page 231: ...y S MIME To use this feature you need to register certificates of the machine and the recipient s device in advance For information on certificates refer to Configuration of E mail Encryption Digital Signature P 611 You can customize the layout of the features displayed on the E mail screen For more information refer to 1st Tab Features Allocation P 498 You can set First Tab or Address Book for th...

Page 232: ...to set the Address Book refer to Add Address Book Entry P 532 z To verify the validity of a certificate prior settings are required For information on the settings refer to Certificate Revocation Retrieval Settings P 490 Types of the Address Book The machine provides two different ways of displaying the Address book Type 1 and Type 2 The Address Book Type1 or Type2 will be displayed depending on t...

Page 233: ...tificate in the Smart Card Note This item is displayed when the Smart Card Reader is connected When Public Entries is Selected Select a recipient from a list under Name Note Scroll the list by drag or flick operation to switch the screen to be displayed For information on how to drag or flick refer to Touch Screen P 88 You can sort recipients in alphabetical order or registered number order List T...

Page 234: ...sents a number between 1 and 3 Note Enable filters from the Custom Filters screen using CentreWare Internet Services to search with keywords Simple Search without Name E mail Address or Custom Item For more information refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services Important To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services users need to have the environment to connect to the Internet...

Page 235: ...ms differ depending on the setting of Attribute Name of Custom Items 1 2 and 3 in the System Administration mode For more information refer to LDAP Server Directory Service Settings P 482 Search The search starts The searched results are listed on the screen Address Book Specifying a Destination Using the Address Book Type 2 The following describes how to specify a destination using the Address Bo...

Page 236: ... shall be borne by you When List all public entries is Selected 1 Select a recipient from a list under Name E mail Address Note Scroll the list by drag or flick operation to switch the screen to be displayed For information on how to drag or flick refer to Touch Screen P 88 You can sort recipients in alphabetical order or registered number order Name E mail Address Lists names and their e mail add...

Page 237: ... than a recipient name and e mail address Select any option from Custom Item and then select the box under Keyword to display a screen for entering a keyword You can enter the keyword with up to 60 characters Note You can select only one custom item z None No custom item is used for the keyword search z Custom Item 1 Telephone Number Telephone Number is set by default When selected a telephone num...

Page 238: ...pient using the keyboard Add current recipient Select a recipient to be registered from the current recipients specified on the First Tab screen Note This item cannot be selected if no recipient is specified on the First Tab screen When New is selected 3 Use the keyboard displayed on the screen to enter an e mail address with up to 128 single byte characters 4 Select Next Note To return to the pre...

Page 239: ... P 532 10 When the settings are completed select Registered Note To return to the previous screen select Back New Recipient Specifying an E mail Address You can specify the recipient s e mail address using the keyboard Enter a part of the address and search the Address Book or directly enter the full address Entering a Part of the E mail Address 1 Select New Recipient 2 Enter a part of the e mail ...

Page 240: ...r to Address Book Settings P 509 To Cc Bcc Allows you to switch the recipient type To Cc Bcc from the drop down menu Add Allows you to add e mail addresses to send e mails to multiple recipients Broadcast Delete Text Deletes all the entered e mail addresses Backspace Moves the cursor back to delete one character Shift Used for switching uppercase characters and lowercase characters More Characters...

Page 241: ... or edited 2 Select any option from the pop up menu Remove Removes the selected recipient Edit Displays the Edit Recipient screen on which you can confirm or edit the recipient Note The recipient cannot be edited depending on the settings in the System Administration mode Refer to Edit Recipient Screen P 241 Close Menu Hides the pop up menu Edit Recipient Screen This screen allows you to confirm a...

Page 242: ...r s e mail address You can specify only one address as a sender s address Note When Login to Local Accounts is selected the e mail address registered in user information is automatically set as a sender s address For more information on user information refer to Create View User Accounts P 536 From may not be editable depending on the setting in the System Administration mode When you send an e ma...

Page 243: ...ject 2 Enter a subject with up to 128 characters using the displayed keyboard For information on how to enter characters refer to Entering Text P 90 Message Entering the E mail Body You can enter the e mail body using the following procedure 1 Select Message 2 Enter a message with up to 512 characters using the displayed keyboard For information on how to enter characters refer to Entering Text P ...

Page 244: ...ning for color documents or the same as when you select Black White in Color Scanning for monochrome documents Color Select this option to scan a color document Black White Scans a document in monochrome two tones You can select the document type in Original Type Note Black White is not selectable when MRC High Compression is set to On on the File Format screen or Microsoft Office format is select...

Page 245: ...er to 2 Sided Scanning Screen P 245 2 Sided Scanning Screen This screen allows you to select the status and orientation of original documents 1 Select any option 1 Sided Select this option to scan only one side of the document 2 Sided Select this option to scan both sides of the document Originals This option is displayed when 2 Sided is selected z Head to Head Select this option when both sides o...

Page 246: ...e is not displayed on the E mail screen depending on the settings in the System Administration mode In that case set Original Type from the Advanced Settings screen 1 From the menu displayed by selecting Original Type select any option Photo Text Select this option when scanning a document that contains both text and photos The machine automatically identifies text and photo areas to scan each are...

Page 247: ...PDF files is Adobe Acrobat 4 0 PDF 1 3 DocuWorks Saves scanned data in DocuWorks format Note To browse or print DocuWorks files on a computer one of the following software is required DocuWorks 4 0 or later DocuWorks Viewer Light 4 0 or later DocuWorks Viewer Light for Web 4 0 or later More Displays the File Format screen Refer to File Format Screen P 247 File Format Screen This screen allows you ...

Page 248: ...nditions error in recognition or loss of graphical information may occur This feature provides the convenience for users who want to directly edit texts or images on the scanned document converted in the Microsoft Office format Note that the strict reproducibility of the texts tables images and pictures on original document may not be ensured due to the scope of this feature Note An optional compo...

Page 249: ...d DocuWorks files Note XPS stands for XML Paper Specification To browse or print DocuWorks files on a computer one of the following software is required DocuWorks 6 0 or later DocuWorks Viewer Light 5 1 or later DocuWorks Viewer Light for Web 5 1 or later This feature is available when Color Scanning is set to Auto Detect Color or Grayscale when Resolution is set to 200 dpi or 300 dpi and when Fil...

Page 250: ...ormat PDF Security screen Allows you to configure security on the data saved as a PDF file to prevent unauthorized access Refer to File Format PDF Security Screen P 252 PDF Signature Displays the File Format PDF Signature screen A visible signature added to a file enables to detect alterations in the file or to prevent impersonation of the sender To verify the signature with Adobe Acrobat select D...

Page 251: ...nfiguration and settings in the System Administration mode z Signature Location Select the position where the signature is displayed when you select On in DocuWorks Signature Note The certificate of the machine is used for DocuWorks digital signature A user certificate cannot be used for the digital signature XPS Signature Displays the File Format XPS Signature screen A visible signature added to ...

Page 252: ... CentreWare Internet Services In the following cases the Searchable Text feature may not function properly If the document is not loaded correctly and thus the text is slanted or if the text on the document is in different orientations If the text on the document is decorated italic hatching strike through etc If the document has background patterns or noise If the text on the document is handwrit...

Page 253: ...e file You can enter a password with up to 32 characters Permissions Displays the PDF Security Permissions screen Refer to PDF Security Permissions Screen P 253 PDF Security Permissions Screen This screen allows you to assign access privileges to a file 1 Select Permissions 2 Select Security Password 3 Select On 4 Enter the security password and select Save 5 Likewise re enter the security passwor...

Page 254: ...crypt a DocuWorks file with a password and assign the access privileges for the file operation 1 Select any option Off The file is not encrypted and no access privilege is assigned Password V4 or later Encrypts the file by the 56 bit AES method using a password Files encrypted by this method can be opened with DocuWorks Ver 4 0 or later Select Open Password to set a password Password V5 or later E...

Page 255: ...s Ver 8 0 or later Select Certificate to set a certificate Note This feature is supported only by the ApeosPort series models Encryption Algorithm Displays the encryption methods Restricted Operations Select file operations to assign access privileges When assigning access privileges set Full Access Password Open Password Displays the DocuWorks Security Open Password screen If you select On and se...

Page 256: ...ess Book screen appears Certificate Address Book screen Select a certificate from the certificate address book Note To switch the Address Book entry type select Public Entries Network Entries Smart Card E mail Address or Device Certificate from the drop down menu on the Certificate Address Book screen The methods that appear in the drop down menu depend on the settings in the System Administration...

Page 257: ...s a certificate When the Address Book Type 2 is Displayed List all public entries Displays the local address list Retrieve entries using index Specify a single alphanumeric index character which is set when registering speed dials to retrieve the addresses or specify a speed dial to display at the top of the address list Search Public Searches recipients in the local address list Search Network Se...

Page 258: ...a Format Select the image format from AutoShapes or Picture Object for image areas of the original document Text Settings Screen This screen allows you to select a language to identify the text on the original document and a font to be used for the recognized text Language of the Original Select the language of the original document from five available types Japanese Korean Traditional Chinese Sim...

Page 259: ...ices users need to have the environment to connect to the Internet The communication fee shall be borne by you 1 Select Network Scanning on the Services Home screen Note WSD stands for Web Services on Devices 2 Select a job template and then select a feature on the Network Scanning screen Job Template Select a default job template for the scan job The default job template is used as a base templat...

Page 260: ...rmation refer to Color Scanning Selecting an Output Color P 244 2 Sided Scanning Scanning Both Sides of a Document You can automatically scan both sides of a 2 sided document By setting the binding style both sides are scanned in the same orientation For more information refer to 2 Sided Scanning Scanning Both Sides of a Document P 244 Original Type Selecting the Document Type You can select the t...

Page 261: ...operating system For information on how to configure the FTP service on Mac OS X 10 7 Lion or OS X 10 8 Mountain Lion consult the official website of Apple Inc For information on supported operating systems refer to Specifications P 918 If you use Mac OS X 10 7 Lion OS X 10 8 Mountain Lion or OS X 10 9 Mavericks contact our Customer Support Center and ask if your operating system is supported You ...

Page 262: ...e Address Book The following describes the Address Book When you select a recipient using the Address Book the following restrictions should be noted z You cannot use address numbers input by the numeric keypad or group numbers to specify the recipient registered in the Address book Types of the Address Book The machine provides two different ways of displaying the Address book Type 1 and Type 2 T...

Page 263: ...crolling stops is displayed again Scroll the list by drag or flick operation to switch the screen to be displayed For information on how to drag or flick refer to Touch Screen P 88 List Thumbnail Allows you to switch the number of the recipients displayed from list five items or thumbnail 15 items Lists the speed dial number Name Lists recipient names and protocols Go to Enter a recipient number u...

Page 264: ...cribes how to specify a destination using the Address Book Type 2 1 Select Address Book 2 Select the destination to store the data in Note To switch the Address Book entry type select List all public entries or Retrieve entries using index from the drop down menu on the Server Address Book screen Select to return to the previous screen or to move to the next screen 3 Select Add Important You can o...

Page 265: ... First Tab screen can also be registered Note Add New Address is not displayed depending on the settings in the System Administration mode or depending on the number of registered recipients Ask your system administrator to confirm the settings and the number of recipients 1 Select Add New Address 2 Select a method to register a recipient New Enter a new recipient using the keyboard Add from curre...

Page 266: ...ser Name z Password For more information on the setting items refer to Specifying a Destination Specifying a Destination PC Using the Screen Keyboard P 268 5 Select Next Note To return to the previous screen select Back When Add from current location is selected 3 Select and set an item if you change a setting Note Transfer Protocol cannot be changed For more information on the setting items refer...

Page 267: ...nd return to the Server Address Book screen select Cancel For more information on the setting items refer to Add Address Book Entry P 532 11 When the settings are completed select Registered Note To return to the previous screen select Back Browse Specifying a Destination PC by Browsing Your Network This feature displays a hierarchy consisting of server names and folders You can specify a save des...

Page 268: ...lected protocol to specify a forwarding destination Important When using the Scan to My Folder feature in computer environment earlier than Windows 98 Windows NT a destination user name in the earlier format domain name user name will not be determined automatically Before scanning change the user name with which you can log in correctly Note When you select Login to Remote Accounts for Login Type...

Page 269: ... Shared Name the Scan to My Folder feature is disabled You can use the Scan to My Folder feature again by selecting Scan to My Folder for Transfer Protocol Save in This option is displayed when you select FTP or SMB in Transfer Protocol Enter a directory path When the save location is in the DFS namespace on Windows enter a folder name Up to 128 characters are allowed Note The folder name is the s...

Page 270: ...password this item is not displayed Preview Previewing the Scanned Images during a Scan Job You can preview the scanned images while scanning the document For more information refer to Preview Previewing the Scanned Images during a Scan Job P 272 Color Scanning Selecting an Output Color You can set the output color to scan a document For more information refer to Color Scanning Selecting an Output...

Page 271: ...features displayed on the Store to Folder screen For more information refer to 1st Tab Features Allocation P 498 1 Select Store to Folder on the Services Home screen 2 Select a feature on the Store to Folder screen Note If a passcode is set for the folder the passcode entry screen may appear Enter the passcode and select Confirm If you have forgotten the passcode set the folder passcode in the Sys...

Page 272: ...r to 2 Sided Scanning Scanning Both Sides of a Document P 244 Original Type Selecting the Document Type You can select the type of the document For more information refer to Original Type Selecting the Document Type P 246 Preview Previewing the Scanned Images during a Scan Job You can preview the scanned images while scanning the document For more information refer to Preview Previewing the Scanne...

Page 273: ...FAT are not supported A USB 2 0 compliant memory device USB 1 1 is not supported A USB memory device with a storage capacity of up to 128 GB Commercially available Memory Card Reader with single slot 1 can be used for Media Print feature but its safe performance is not guaranteed When a Memory Card Reader with multi slot 2 is used only one particular slot is available And which slot is available d...

Page 274: ... If a commercially available Memory Card Reader is used and it is left inserted all the time the machine does not detect media even when they are inserted into the slot of the Memory Card Reader Screen display remains the same when the inserted USB memory device or Memory Card is removed Press the Services Home button or do anything else to change the screen display before starting next operation ...

Page 275: ... Appears 1 Press the Services Home button 2 Select Store to USB on the Services Home screen The Store to USB screen appears Note WSD stands for Web Services on Devices When the Screen Display Does Not Change 1 If any screen other than the Services Home screen is displayed press the Services Home button 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Services Home button 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Services Home button ...

Page 276: ...Note Select to return to the previous screen or to move to the next screen Scroll the list by drag or flick operation to switch the screen to be displayed For information on how to drag or flick refer to Touch Screen P 88 You can sort the order of folders displayed in ascending or descending order by selecting Name or Last Updated Up to 900 folder names can be displayed in the list of Save in File...

Page 277: ...o upper directory Next Allows you to move to the lower directory Note This button is available when a folder is selected Details Displaying the Details of a Storage Location in the USB Memory Device Selecting Details displays the Details screen Details Screen This screen displays the folder directory in the USB memory device 1 Specify the folder directory and then select Save 2 Select Details The ...

Page 278: ...g Scanning Both Sides of a Document You can automatically scan both sides of a 2 sided document By setting the binding style both sides are scanned in the same orientation For more information refer to 2 Sided Scanning Scanning Both Sides of a Document P 244 Original Type Selecting the Document Type You can select the type of the document For more information refer to Original Type Selecting the D...

Page 279: ...y after retrieving the scanned data access the URL to delete the scanned data stored in the machine Note The Store Send Link service does not provide features to manage documents such as backing up restoring files deleting all data at one time listing files and displaying available storage space The Store Send Link service allows you to retrieve scanned data without specifying an e mail address fr...

Page 280: ... using the displayed keyboard For information on how to enter characters refer to Entering Text P 90 Color Scanning Selecting an Output Color You can set the color mode to scan a document For more information refer to Color Scanning Selecting an Output Color P 244 2 Sided Scanning Scanning Both Sides of a Document You can automatically scan both sides of a 2 sided document By setting the binding s...

Page 281: ... To prevent other parties from viewing your scan data select PDF or DocuWorks in File Format and set a password in PDF Security or DocuWorks Security before scanning the document For more information refer to File Format Selecting a File Format for Output Data P 246 Note If you select TIFF JPEG Auto Select or the Single File for Each Page check box on the File Format screen when scanning a documen...

Page 282: ...panel of the machine Specify these settings in Scan Profiles of Windows For more information on how to specify the settings refer to Windows Help WSD stands for Web Services on Devices 1 Select Store to WSD on the Services Home screen 2 Select a feature on the Store to WSD screen Start Scan Job From Select from where to start a scan job z Computer Starts a scan job by sending a request from a netw...

Page 283: ...machine model name is not displayed click Change and select the machine 5 Click the Profile list and then select Document 6 Specify the settings as necessary and then click Scan 4 After being scanned the scanned data is forwarded to the specified computer Store to WSD Remove Your Originals screen appears on the touch screen after a scan job has been completed Note If the standby screen is not disp...

Page 284: ...PC Scan for Print to PC Scan for E mail to PC Scan for OCR to PC in accordance with the intended use 3 Press the Start button 4 The scanned data will be forwarded to the specified destination Note Select Delete to abort scanning 5 Check the forwarded data on the destination computer Start 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 C Start button ...

Page 285: ...fying the Color Space 288 1 On the Services Home screen select E mail Store to Folder Network Scanning Scan to PC Store Send Link or Store to USB Note WSD stands for Web Services on Devices 2 Select a feature on the Advanced Settings screen Note To activate Color Space a prior setting must be made in the System Administration mode For information on the setting procedure refer to Color Space P 504...

Page 286: ...Select Enhance Photographs Image Options Adjusting Scan Density and Image Sharpness This feature allows you to adjust the scan density and image sharpness 1 Select Image Options 2 Select any option Lighten Darken You can select a scan density level from seven levels between Lighten and Darken Selecting an upper cell on the bar makes the scan density lighter and selecting a lower cell makes darker ...

Page 287: ...ground of a document printed on white color paper will be suppressed Contrast Allows you to select a contrast level from five levels between Less and More Selecting an upper cell on the bar makes the difference between light and dark areas greater light areas become lighter and dark areas darker In contrast selecting a lower cell on the bar makes the difference between light and dark areas smaller...

Page 288: ...lor space that conforms to sYCC Device Color Space Documents are scanned based on the original color representation color space of the machine Recommended for advanced color processing using high quality color Note You can find ICC profile data for Device Color Space in the Software Manual CD ROM ICC profile is useful when using color processing application and performing special processing of dat...

Page 289: ...uments Simultaneously 292 Edge Erase Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the Document 294 Reduce Enlarge Specifying a Scanning Ratio 295 Original Orientation Specifying the Orientation of the Loaded Documents 296 1 On the Services Home screen select E mail Store to Folder Network Scanning Scan to PC Store Send Link or Store to USB Note WSD stands for Web Services on Devices 2 Select a feature on t...

Page 290: ...a Document You can automatically scan both sides of a 2 sided document By setting the binding style both sides are scanned in the same orientation This feature is the same as 2 Sided Scanning on the E mail screen For more information refer to 2 Sided Scanning Scanning Both Sides of a Document P 244 Book Scanning Scanning Facing Pages on Separate Sheets This feature allows you to scan facing pages ...

Page 291: ...t this option when Left Page then Right or Right Page then Left is selected Top Page Only Scans the top page only in page order You can select this option when Top Page then Bottom is selected Bottom Page Only Scans the bottom page only in page order You can select this option when Top Page then Bottom is selected Binding Edge Erase Erases the shadow from the center section of the document You can...

Page 292: ...ngth Y in 1 mm increments The scales attached on the upper and left edges of the document glass are helpful for you to specify values Note When MRC High Compression is set On for PDF DocuWorks and XPS files on the File Format screen or when the Specific Color check box is selected the variable ranges are 50 to 432 mm for the scan width X and 50 to 297 mm for the scan length Y in 1 mm increments XP...

Page 293: ...when an A3 landscape original is loaded and the output size is set to A4 portrait the scanned image is reduced to A5 landscape and printed on A4 portrait paper If the document size cannot be detected automatically a screen to enter the document size appears 1 Select Mixed Size Originals 2 Select any option Off Select this option when all documents are of the same size On When scanning documents of...

Page 294: ...ttom left and right and center of the document 4 Select Original Orientation All Edges The edge width to erase is set to 2 mm for the top and bottom and left and right edges Parallel Edges Allows you to adjust the edge erase amounts z Top Bottom Erases the shadows of top and bottom edges of the document according to the orientation of the loaded document You can specify the edge width to erase in ...

Page 295: ...ocument is placed facing the left side horizontal text Reduce Enlarge Specifying a Scanning Ratio This feature allows you to set the scanning ratio for the document to be scanned Note When Searchable Text is set to Searchable and the Specific Color check box is selected on the File Format screen Reduce Enlarge is 100 and cannot be changed 1 Select Reduce Enlarge 2 Select any option Proportional Al...

Page 296: ...f the Loaded Documents Set the orientation of the loaded document to specify the top edge of the document Note If the Original Orientation setting differs from the actual document orientation the machine may not detect the top of the document correctly z Upright Images Select this option when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the document glass or document feeder z Sidew...

Page 297: ...e Name Conflict 301 File Name Specifying a Name for the File to be Saved 302 Encryption Sending E mail Encrypted by S MIME 302 Digital Signature Sending E mail with a Digital Signature by S MIME 302 Login Name 303 Password 303 Meta Data 303 1 On the Services Home screen select E mail Store to Folder Network Scanning Scan to PC Store Send Link or Store to USB Note WSD stands for Web Services on Dev...

Page 298: ...s Specifying Read Receipts When using the E mail service you can receive read receipts from e mail recipients This feature is available only when recipients support the MDN feature Note Read Receipts is displayed only when Tools System Settings E mail Settings E mail Control Read Receipts is set to On When multiple e mails are sent using Split Send a read receipt is requested for each e mail Read ...

Page 299: ...mail screen is set to PDF DocuWorks or XPS or when File Format is set to TIFF with Single File for Each Page check box not selected XPS stands for XML Paper Specification Split by Data Size The data is split by a certain data size Note Select this option if your e mail application supports message partial File Name Specifying a Name for the File to be Sent When using the E mail Scan to PC Network ...

Page 300: ...characters refer to Entering Text P 90 Note When each page is saved as one file the page number is added to the end of each file name Up to 128 characters can be entered as a file name for the Scan to PC service Up to 28 characters can be entered as a file name for the E mail service Up to 28 characters can be entered as a file name for the Store Send Link service Up to 40 characters can be entere...

Page 301: ...ore information refer to Address Book P 231 File Name Conflict Setting the Action to be Taken for File Name Conflict When using the Scan to PC service you can set the action to be taken when the file name conflicts with another file stored in the destination 1 Select File Name Conflict 2 Select any option Do Not Save Cancels the job without saving the file Rename New File Automatically changes the...

Page 302: ...u can send e mail encrypted by S MIME When sending encrypted e mail select an e mail address associated with a certificate that can be encrypted from the Address Book Note You can change the default value of E mail Encryption in the System Administration mode For information on how to change the default value refer to E mail Encryption P 501 Off Sends e mail without encryption On Sends e mail with...

Page 303: ...refer to Entering Text P 90 Password You can enter the password for a destination server Note This feature is displayed only when Network Scanning is selected on the Services Home screen 1 Select Password 2 Enter the password using the keyboard displayed on the screen For information on how to enter characters refer to Entering Text P 90 Meta Data You can change the values of the DMF if they are s...

Page 304: ...5 Scan 304 Scan 5 ...

Page 305: ...erations and features to use folders z Folder Operating Procedure 306 z Selecting a folder under Scan Other Jobs 308 z Checking Operating Files in a Folder 309 z Checking File Details 311 z Printing Files in a Folder 315 z Configuring Starting Job Flow 318 ...

Page 306: ...rs and shared folders separately Step 1 Opening the Send from Folder Screen 306 Step 2 Selecting a Folder 307 Step 3 Checking Selecting Files in a Folder 307 Step 4 Operating Files in a Folder 307 Step 1 Opening the Send from Folder Screen The following describes how to select features on the Send from Folder screen Note The features displayed on the screen depend on your machine configuration 1 P...

Page 307: ... enter the passcode and select Confirm Step 3 Checking Selecting Files in a Folder 1 Select the display style from List and Thumbnail 2 Select a file to send by e mail or to print For information on the File List screen refer to Checking Operating Files in a Folder P 309 Step 4 Operating Files in a Folder The following shows the reference sections for operations available on the Send from Folder s...

Page 308: ...olders P 647 1 Select a folder on the Send from Folder screen Note Select to return to the previous screen or to move to the next screen Drag or flick the screen vertically to switch the screen to be displayed For information on how to drag or flick refer to Touch Screen P 88 An arrow is displayed next to each folder which has a link to a job flow sheet and for which the auto start is set If the p...

Page 309: ...e Name or Date Time In the list view an icon is displayed at the left of each file name to show the file type Scan file You can select up to 100 files separately or select all files at a time If you select files separately a number appears to the left of the icon indicating the order in which it was selected Files are processed in this order 3 Select any option Refresh Displays the updated informa...

Page 310: ...he folder To deselect all the files select this button again while all the files are being selected Delete Deletes the selected files in the folder File Details Preview Previews the selected file to allow you to check its details Refer to Checking File Details P 311 Job Flow Settings Displays the Job Flow Settings screen on which you can create link and execute job flows Refer to Configuring Start...

Page 311: ...ew 3 When you select multiple files select a file to check details 4 Select any option Thumbnailed view A previewed image is displayed in a thumbnailed view In the thumbnailed view the following operations are available Note Drag or flick the screen vertically to switch the screen to be displayed For information on how to drag or flick refer to Touch Screen P 88 Feature Operation Switching pages o...

Page 312: ...e Drag or flick the preview area except for the information area page switching buttons and thumbnailed bar z Tap or of the page switching buttons Displaying previous and next pages Tap a previous or next page Enlarging an image Enlarged view Double tap a preview image Switching the page switching buttons and thumbnailed bar Tap the preview area Note Tap the preview area except for the information...

Page 313: ...Drag or flick the preview area except for the slider and thumbnailed bar After switching the page the image is displayed in the entire view Changing the ratio of the image size Double tap a preview image or drag the slider Switching the page switching buttons and thumbnailed bar Tap the preview area Note Tap the preview area except for the slider and thumbnailed bar Moving the display position Dra...

Page 314: ...layed keyboard to enter a new name Change Print Settings Allows you to change the print settings of the file previewed on the screen Print Prints the selected files Note To set for printing return to the Folder File List screen and select Print For more information refer to Printing Files in a Folder P 315 ...

Page 315: ...e numeric keypad if necessary 4 Select Print Print Allows you to set printing Paper Supply Allows you to select paper 2 Sided Printing Allows you to set 2 sided printing Output Allows you to set stapling punching and a tray where the output is delivered Note An optional component is required to use this feature For more information contact our Customer Support Center For examples of the settings o...

Page 316: ...upting another job Paper Supply Allows you to select paper 2 Sided Printing Allows you to set 2 sided printing Output Allows you to set stapling and punching and a tray where the output is delivered The number of sheets that can be stapled when 90 gsm paper is used C3 Finisher C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker 2 50 sheets Finisher D4 Finisher D4 with Booklet Finisher D5 2 100 sheets For examples of t...

Page 317: ...r punching z For scan files stored in a folder Important Ensure that the actual orientation of the original document matches the Original Orientation setting in Edge Erase or in 2 Sided Scanning on the Layout Adjustment screen Original Original Orientation Stapling Position Punching Position Report Report Report Report R e p o r t R e p o r t R e p o r t R e p o r t Report Report Report Report Rep...

Page 318: ... Authentication feature is disabled a job flow created in Send from Folder can only be used edited duplicated deleted through the folder where the job flow is created This type of job flow is not displayed on the Create Job Flow Sheet screen When the Authentication feature is enabled job flow sheets whose owners are authenticated are displayed on the Create Job Flow Sheet screen For information on...

Page 319: ... folder Important After executing the job flow confirm the Job Status screen or print a Job History Report to check the result For information on the Job History Report refer to Job History Report P 436 Cut Link Cancels the link between a folder and the linked job flow sheet Create Change Link Displays the Link Job Flow Sheet to Folder screen Refer to Link Job Flow Sheet to Folder Screen P 320 Sel...

Page 320: ...d Note Drag or flick the screen vertically to switch the screen to be displayed For information on how to drag or flick refer to Touch Screen P 88 Select to return to the previous screen or to move to the next screen You can sort the list in ascending or descending order by selecting either Name or Updated 2 Select Job Flow Settings 3 Select Create Change Link 4 Select any option Refresh Displays ...

Page 321: ...yword screen Select a keyword registered in the System Administration mode to search for job flows Job flows that fully match the entry are searched The machine searches through keywords that were registered upon each job flow creation Sheet Filtering Displays the Sheet Filtering screen Refer to Sheet Filtering Screen P 321 Sheet Filtering Screen This screen allows you to filter the job flow sheet...

Page 322: ...ong For information on how to enter characters refer to Entering Text P 90 Search by Keyword Searches for job flows that fully match the entry The machine searches through keywords that were registered upon each job flow creation The entry can be up to 12 characters long You can select from preset keywords if they have been registered in the System Administration mode For information on how to ent...

Page 323: ...job flow sheet registered on the machine Job Flow Sheets is a service that allows you to register transfer settings for scanning data such as a transfer method and destination to simplify data transfer tasks z Job Flow Procedure 324 z Selecting Changing a Job Flow Sheet 326 ...

Page 324: ...p 1 Opening the Job Flow Sheets Screen 324 Step 2 Selecting a Job Flow Sheet 324 Step 3 Confirming Changing the Job Flow Sheet 325 Step 4 Starting the Job Flow Sheet 325 Note To create a job flow sheet use Device Setup Tool You can download Device Setup Tool from our official web site Step 1 Opening the Job Flow Sheets Screen The following describes how to open the Job Flow Sheets screen 1 Press t...

Page 325: ...change job flow settings refer to Selecting Changing a Job Flow Sheet P 326 Step 4 Starting the Job Flow Sheet 1 Load a document Note A job flow with an application linked does not require you to load a document 2 Press the Start button Important After executing the job flow be sure to print a Job History Report to check the result For information on the Job History Report refer to Job History Rep...

Page 326: ...be displayed For information on how to drag or flick refer to Touch Screen P 88 You can sort the list in ascending or descending order by selecting either Name or Updated Refresh Displays refreshed information Details Displays the Details screen You can confirm the details of a job flow such as the name last updated date target owner and save location When you select the button the whole text of t...

Page 327: ...o be changed Note A triangle icon appears at the left of each mandatory item 4 Select any option Items Displays the items set for the job flow sheet Current Settings Displays the values set for the job flow sheet Previous Group Displays the items of the previous group Next Group Displays the items of the next group Add E mail Recipient Adds recipients for the e mail Sheet Filtering Screen This scr...

Page 328: ...eet Filtering 2 Select the filtering conditions and select Save Owner Select the owner of job flow sheets to filter Target Select the target of job flow sheets to filter Note Job flow sheets whose Target is Folder can be used only from Send from Folder ...

Page 329: ... This chapter describes the Stored Programming service that enables you to store customized job settings z Stored Programming Overview 330 z Registering Deleting Renaming Stored Programs 331 z Calling a Stored Program 337 ...

Page 330: ...ns For example this service is available when you want to record a procedure starting from pressing the Machine Status button to displaying the screen under Print Reports to print a Job History Report In addition while Build Job is running this service can be used for the remaining document stacks For information on Build Job refer to Build Job Processing Documents Scanned with Different Settings ...

Page 331: ...me button 2 Select Setup 3 Select Stored Programming 4 Select a feature Store Register a stored program Refer to Registering Stored Programs P 332 Store Build Job Register a stored program for Build Job Refer to Registering Stored Programs for Build Job P 334 Delete Deletes a stored program Select the stored program number to be deleted Refer to Deleting Stored Programs P 335 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 S...

Page 332: ...overwritten Select to return to the previous screen or to move to the next screen Scroll the list by drag or flick operation to switch the screen to be displayed For information on how to drag or flick refer to Touch Screen P 88 3 Set the feature you want to register Note The machine sounds an audible tone while a stored program is being registered Press the Interrupt button to cancel registration...

Page 333: ...t unit millimeters or inches is changed If a job is selected from the list of the stored jobs in Secure Print Jobs More under Job Status Selecting items using the scroll bar z The following features and operations cannot be registered in Stored Programming Registration and call of a stored program EP Diagnostic Request System Settings The Media Print Text and Media Print Photos buttons on the Serv...

Page 334: ...witch the screen to be displayed For information on how to drag or flick refer to Touch Screen P 88 3 Set the feature you want to register Note The machine sounds an audible tone while a stored program is being registered Press the Interrupt button to cancel registration You can change the volume of the sound that notifies that a stored program is being registered For information on the settings r...

Page 335: ... Delete Note Deleted stored programs cannot be restored Entering Changing a Stored Program Name The following describes how to enter or change the name of a stored program Up to 18 characters are allowed for a stored program s name For information on how to enter characters refer to Entering Text P 90 1 Select Enter Change Name 2 Select the number to register or change a name Note Scroll the list ...

Page 336: ...tored program number to assign or change an icon Note Scroll the list by drag or flick operation to switch the screen to be displayed For information on how to drag or flick refer to Touch Screen P 88 Select to return to the previous screen or to move to the next screen 3 Select an icon and select Save No Icon No icon is assigned to a registered stored program Icon Select an icon according to the ...

Page 337: ...ck operation to switch the screen to be displayed For information on how to drag or flick refer to Touch Screen P 88 Select to return to the previous screen or to move to the next screen After the stored program has been called the machine sounds an audible tone If a failure occurs the machine sounds a fault tone For information on how to change the volume of the sound that notifies that a stored ...

Page 338: ...tab 3 Select Stored Programming 4 Select a number of a stored program containing the features you want to use Note You can only select registered numbers After the stored program has been called the machine sounds an audible tone If a failure occurs the machine sounds a fault tone For information on how to change the volume of the sound that notifies that a stored program has been called refer to ...

Page 339: ...eb Applications This chapter describes how to operate web applications z Web Applications Overview 340 z Accessing Web Applications 341 z Accessing Using Buttons Registered on the Services Home screen 342 ...

Page 340: ...he machine and displaying the web application screen on the machine z Storing scanned documents directly in a web application folder z Printing a file directly that is stored on a remote server Important The web applications that can be displayed on the machine are those which are compatible with the machine You cannot access website on the Internet Note To access the web application on the machin...

Page 341: ...ister an access destination refer to Server Setup P 518 1 Press the Services Home button 2 Select Web Applications Note WSD stands for Web Services on Devices 3 Select an access destination 4 Select Open from the pop up menu displayed Open Accesses the specified remote service Details Displays the information of the specified remote service Close Menu Hides the pop up menu 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Serv...

Page 342: ...the buttons For information on how to assign buttons displayed on the Services Home screen refer to Services Home P 425 1 Press the Services Home button 2 Select Head Office registered on the Services Home screen Note In this example an access destination named Head Office is registered in the default position of the Web Applications button You can assign the button anywhere on the screen WSD stan...

Page 343: ...e basic procedures and features of Media Print Text and Media Print Photos when a USB Memory Kit is connected z Overview of Media Print 344 z Inserting USB Memory Device 347 z Media Print Text 350 z Media Print Photos 352 z Selecting the Printing Options 354 ...

Page 344: ...lable Memory Card Reader with single slot 1 can be used for Media Print feature text photo but its safe performance is not guaranteed When a Memory Card Reader with multi slot 2 is used only one particular slot is available And which slot is available differs according to models and slot of media Memory Card that you want to use is not always available Safe performance of a Memory Card Reader with...

Page 345: ...edia Print Use media formatted with digital cameras or computers FAT12 FAT16 FAT32 only Use USB 2 0 compliant memory devices with the size up to 128GB only USB 1 1 compliant memory devices are not supported If a file name contains machine dependent codes the file may not be recognized or displayed on the screen correctly Notes and Restrictions on Media Print The following notes and restrictions ap...

Page 346: ... Print For more information on Print Processing Mode refer to PDF Direct Print P 948 z You can use a USB host adapter to print from your USB memory device or via your USB cable as necessary but the operation is not guaranteed z Multiple USB memory devices cannot be used simultaneously z Use USB 2 0 compliant memory devices only USB 1 1 compliant memory devices are not supported The following USB m...

Page 347: ...tatus will be one of the above even when a USB memory device in which only encrypted data is stored is inserted or USB memory device in unsupported format is inserted In such case a warning message appears during operation and the operation is aborted The screen status will be one of the above when a commercially available Memory Card Reader is inserted into the USB memory slot of the machine It i...

Page 348: ... Note WSD stands for Web Services on Devices When the Media Print Text Screen Appears Select a feature on the Media Print Text screen When the Media Print Photos Screen Appears Select a feature on the Media Print Photos screen When the Screen Display Does Not Change 1 If any screen other than the Services Home screen is displayed press the Services Home button 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Services Home but...

Page 349: ...e device before use When disconnecting connecting the USB memory device by methods other than described in this guide When receiving the effect of electrical noise or an electrical discharge When a fault or failure occurs during operation If the USB memory device receives mechanical damage We assume no responsibility for any direct and indirect damages arising from or caused by such data loss Note...

Page 350: ... in First File and Last File Note Select Select From List to display a list of files and reference the list when selecting the range of files to be printed Index Print Prints a list of the selected files with the index numbers automatically assigned For more information on Index Print refer to Index Print P 356 2 Select the files to be printed and set the printing options For more information on t...

Page 351: ... specify the folders as file storage locations an error occurs For more information on characters that the machine supports refer to Entering Text P 90 The machine does not distinguish between upper and lower cases of folder and file names that are created in Windows environment and that consist of eight characters or less The names for these folders and files are displayed in capital letters Sele...

Page 352: ...ect From List Displays the Select From List screen Refer to Select From List Screen P 353 Select Range Use and to specify the range of files to be printed in First picture and Last picture under Media Print Photos Note Select Select From List to display a list of files and reference the list when selecting the range Index Print Prints a list of the selected files with the index numbers automatical...

Page 353: ...e You can sort the list in ascending or descending order by selecting Name or Date Time The number of files selected appears on the top on the screen Thumbnail Displays a list of the images and names of the files Important The thumbnail view may not be available for some files If a file is not displayed in thumbnail view display it in list view or in Index Print Characters and images may not be co...

Page 354: ... mm When the desired tray is not displayed select More and on the screen displayed select the tray When you select More and then Bypass you can set Paper Size and Paper Type z Paper Size Select the paper size to be used from the list SRA3 A3 B4 A4 A4 B5 B5 8 5 x 11 8 5 x 11 100 x 148 mm z Paper Type Select the paper type to be used from the list 2 Sided Printing Off Long Edge Flip Short Edge Flip ...

Page 355: ... paper is loaded A3 B4 A4 A4 B5 B5 A5 A5 8 5 x 11 8 5 x 11 8 5 x 14 11 x 17 When you select Auto Select the machine automatically selects a tray that contains the same size of paper as the document and prints the document at its original size When the desired tray is not displayed select More and on the screen displayed select the tray When you select More and then Bypass you can set Paper Size an...

Page 356: ...tings you have specified for Media Print Text or Media Print Photos before selecting the Index Print check box will be effective To change these settings deselect the Index Print check box change the print settings and then perform Index Print The setting values return to the defaults if the machine is rebooted The following setting items are restricted when you select Index Print Setting Item Val...

Page 357: ...to check the status of jobs and operate the jobs z Job Status Overview 358 z Checking Current Pending Jobs 359 z Checking Completed Jobs 360 z Printing and Deleting Stored Jobs 362 z Printing Pending Jobs 380 z Handling Error Terminations 381 ...

Page 358: ...current or pending jobs For more information refer to Checking Current Pending Jobs P 359 Checking completed jobs Displays the status of completed jobs and their details For more information refer to Checking Completed Jobs P 360 Checking stored jobs Prints or deletes jobs stored using the Charge Print Secure Print Private Charge Print Sample Set and Delayed Print features For more information ref...

Page 359: ...te or Promote Job Print Waiting Jobs Prints the jobs that are waiting to be output or resumed For more information refer to Printing Pending Jobs P 380 Delete Cancels the current or pending job Promote Job Preferentially executes the selected job If you select this button appears under the Status of the selected job Delete Stops processing the job Last Original Select this button to end scanning o...

Page 360: ...ct the Group Parent Jobs check box to display child jobs of completed Broadcast Sends Select a child job from the list to show the details When the Group Parent Jobs check box is selected you can display child jobs by selecting a parent job Then select a child job from the list to show the details The values under Result show quantity pages and percentage The value type depends on the job type Sel...

Page 361: ...Checking Completed Jobs 361 Job Status 11 Print this Job History Report Prints the Job History Report Print this Job Report Prints the Job Report ...

Page 362: ...escribes how to print or delete jobs stored with the Secure Print feature Note This feature does not appear when Receive Control in Charge Private Print Settings is set to either of the following Select According to Print Auditron and then select Save as Private Charge Print Job in Job Login Success Select Save as Private Charge Print Job When you select the paper type from the Multi model Print D...

Page 363: ... Files in a folder can be displayed in a list or thumbnailed view You can also preview the files You can set whether or not to display detailed information in the list screen of the stored files For more information refer to Display Details of Stored Print Job List P 514 5 Select any option 6 When printing specify the number of print sets using the numeric keypad Select All Selects all jobs To des...

Page 364: ...t page is displayed for the preview screen A previewed image cannot be rotated on the Secure Print screen Entire view An entire preview image is displayed In the entire view the file name Stored Date Pages and setting values of Staple and Hole Punch are displayed on the right side of the preview area In the entire view the following operation is available Feature Operation Enlarging an image Switc...

Page 365: ...ion is displayed only Print Prints the Secure Print job For more information refer to When Print is Selected P 365 When Print is Selected 1 Specify how to process the job after printing Note The screen as shown on the right does not appear if Print Job Confirmation Screen is set to Disabled in the System Administration mode If Disabled is selected the machine automatically deletes the job after pr...

Page 366: ...sing Authentication Information P 386 For more information refer to Charge Private Print Settings P 549 1 Select Sample Set 2 Select the user you want to check and select Job List Note Select Refresh to display the updated information Scroll the list by drag or flick operation to switch the screen to be displayed For information on how to drag or flick refer to Touch Screen P 88 You can enter a us...

Page 367: ...he job the job is deleted Refer to When Print is Selected P 369 When Delete is Selected 1 Select Delete Delete Deletes the job Important Once the job is deleted it cannot be restored Cancel Cancels deleting the job When Preview is Selected 1 Select any option Note Only the first page is displayed for the preview screen A previewed image cannot be rotated on the Sample Set screen Entire view An ent...

Page 368: ...Edge Booklet Creation Displays Left Top Bind and Right Bottom Bind Note This item is displayed when the booklet layout is set using a printer driver When the orientation of booklet creation cannot be detected Booklet Creation is displayed only Print Prints the Sample Set job Refer to When Print is Selected P 369 Feature Operation Enlarging an image Switching to enlarged view Double tap a preview i...

Page 369: ... at specified time Up to 100 jobs can be stored queued simultaneously for the Delayed Print feature If the power is switched off when jobs are in queue before the specified print time the jobs whose print time has elapsed will automatically be printed immediately after the power is switched on again The following describes how to print or delete jobs stored with the Delayed Print feature For infor...

Page 370: ...Details of Stored Print Job List P 514 3 Select any option Delete Deletes the Delayed Print job Refer to When Delete is Selected P 370 Preview Displays the previewed image on the first page of the selected job Note If you select multiple documents Preview cannot be selected Refer to When Preview is Selected P 370 Print Prints the Delayed Print job After printing the job is deleted If printed manua...

Page 371: ... the following operations are available Print Quantity Specifies the number of print sets Output Color Displays the output color of the document to be printed 2 Sided Printing Displays 1 Sided Flip on Short Edge and Flip on Long Edge Booklet Creation Displays Left Top Bind and Right Bottom Bind Note This item is displayed when the booklet layout is set using a printer driver Feature Operation Enla...

Page 372: ...ive Control the jobs are saved for each Billing ID Any jobs that were not given a Billing ID on the print driver are saved in No User ID For more information on how to register user IDs on the machine refer to Create View User Accounts P 536 Note Unlike the Private Charge Print feature the Charge Print feature can store jobs without a user ID such as e mail printing and print jobs sent from Conten...

Page 373: ...e passcode is not set the passcode entry screen does not appear 6 Select the job to be printed or deleted Note You can select up to 100 files simultaneously to print or delete the files If you select multiple files they are printed in the selected order Stored files can be displayed in a list or thumbnailed view You can also preview the files You can set whether or not to display detailed informat...

Page 374: ... Cancels deleting the job When Preview is Selected 1 Select any option Note Only the first page is displayed for the preview screen A previewed image cannot be rotated on the Charge Print screen Entire view An entire preview image is displayed In the entire view the file name Stored Date Pages and setting values of Staple and Hole Punch are displayed on the right side of the preview area In the en...

Page 375: ...displayed only Print Prints the Charge Print job After printing the job is deleted Refer to When Print is Selected P 375 When Print is Selected 1 Specify how to process the job after printing Note The screen as shown on the right does not appear if Print Job Confirmation Screen is set to Disabled in the System Administration mode If Disabled is selected the machine automatically deletes the job af...

Page 376: ...lect the paper type from the Multi model Print Driver 2 and execute a print job the paper type is converted to the paper type which is supported on your machine and the job will be started For information on how to convert paper types refer to Converting Paper Types P 387 The Private Charge Print feature restricts the use of the machine through either user ID authentication or card authentication ...

Page 377: ...of print sets using the numeric keypad Select All Selects all jobs To deselect all the jobs select this button again Delete Deletes the Private Charge Print job Note If jobs with the same user ID are all deleted the user ID will be deleted Refer to When Delete is Selected P 377 Preview Displays the previewed image on the first page of the selected job Note If you select multiple documents Preview ...

Page 378: ...ed on the right side of the preview area In the entire view the following operation is available Enlarged view A previewed image is enlarged or reduced In the enlarged view the following operations are available Print Quantity Specifies the number of print sets Output Color Displays the output color of the document to be printed Feature Operation Enlarging an image Enlarged view Double tap a previ...

Page 379: ...eted Refer to When Print is Selected P 379 When Print is Selected 1 Specify how to process the job after printing Note The screen as shown on the right does not appear if Print Job Confirmation Screen is set to Disabled in the System Administration mode If Disabled is selected the machine automatically deletes the job after printing without displaying the confirmation screen For more information r...

Page 380: ...pending job without waiting for this time period to elapse If a job is paused by the Stop button and is waiting to be resumed you can also resume the job If there are multiple jobs subsequent jobs are printed after the paused job has been printed Note If there are no pending jobs Print Waiting Jobs is disabled For information on how to set Auto Print refer to Auto Print P 421 1 Press the Job Statu...

Page 381: ...matically cancel the error job so that subsequent jobs can be printed For more information on the setting refer to Print Service Settings P 492 For information on error codes refer to Error Code P 762 For a Scan Job A Transmission Report Job Undelivered is printed For more information on the Transmission Report Job Undelivered refer to Transmission Report Job Undelivered P 628 For Other Jobs Print...

Page 382: ...11 Job Status 382 Job Status 11 ...

Page 383: ...er Note The computer screen images shown in this chapter are as of August 2014 The procedures in this chapter may vary depending on the driver and utility software being used due to the upgrades z Features Overview 384 z Print 385 z E mail Printing 389 z Registering Destinations 390 z Importing Scanned Data 392 z CentreWare Internet Services 399 ...

Page 384: ...rom the machine according to the settings on the machine For more information refer to E mail Printing P 389 Importing Scanned Data Imports files stored in a folder of the machine to a computer For more information refer to Importing Scanned Data P 392 CentreWare Internet Services Displays the machine status and job status The feature also allows you to change settings as well as to import files s...

Page 385: ...nts multiple pages onto one sheet of paper 2 Sided Print Prints data on both sides of paper Poster Splits one page of print data into multiple sheets of paper and enlarges the printed image to fit the size of each sheet Used to create large posters Booklet Creation Performs 2 sided printing and page allocation for printing a booklet in the correct page order Watermark Prints preset text such as Co...

Page 386: ...nly the registered user can print the jobs Note To prohibit other users from operating jobs register a passcode for your Billing ID on the print driver For information on how to set Charge Print refer to Charge Private Print Settings P 549 For information on how to print a Charge Print job refer to Charge Print P 372 Private Charge Print This feature allows you to temporarily store print data in t...

Page 387: ...log box Note Environment friendliness level is indicated on the notification screen with leaves This information is provided only when Normal Print or Sample Print is selected in the Job Type Converting Paper Types For printing the paper type is converted to the paper type which is supported on your machine and the job will be started This section describes the paper type conversion when the Multi...

Page 388: ...ified from the Multi model Print Driver 2 or papers other than the above are specified the paper type is automatically converted to Uncoated paper 81 90 gsm on your machine Heavyweight Reload Uncoated Reload 106 135 gsm Extra Heavyweight Uncoated 177 220 gsm Extra Heavyweight Reload Uncoated Reload 177 220 gsm Custom Paper 1 Uncoated 81 90 gsm Custom Paper 2 Uncoated 81 90 gsm Custom Paper 3 Uncoa...

Page 389: ...cribes how to receive e mails from Microsoft Outlook Express on a computer as an example 1 Use your e mail software to create an e mail body and then attach a document to the e mail if necessary Important Only plain text is available for the e mail body Change the body text format to plain text on your e mail application Any forwarded e mail that is attached to another e mail cannot be printed Not...

Page 390: ...ed or changed Therefore do not edit or change the file in CSV format Address Book data with software such as Microsoft Excel 1 Note Using CentreWare Internet Services you can import a CSV format file which is created by other than the machine to the Address Book of the machine For more information refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services A CSV format file may not be imported depending on ...

Page 391: ...7 Enter the IP address or Internet address of another Versant 80 Press in the browser address field and press the Enter key 8 Click the Properties tab and select Public Address Book in the left frame on the screen Note On the Properties tab you cannot import the Address Book data created from a CSV file which you have downloaded from the Address Book tab Use the Address Book tab to import such Add...

Page 392: ... of Ethernet2 is specified Network Scanner Utility 3 cannot operate For more information refer to TCP IP Network Settings TCP IP Network Settings Ethernet 1 TCP IP Network Settings Ethernet 2 P 474 To import files stored in a folder prior settings are required such as enabling ports For more information refer to Configuration of Store to Folder P 584 For information on the operation of the applica...

Page 393: ...from Registered Folders Clicking Select Scanner returns to step 5 where you can reselect a scanner 7 Click Confirm 8 Select a file to be imported from the list and click Import Note You can select multiple files Import Refresh and Delete are available from the menu that appears when you right click on the list When the import starts the scan data is forwarded from the folder to the computer After ...

Page 394: ...mport files from a machine s folder Stored File Manager 3 is software to import files from a machine s folder to a computer without using any client side application To use Stored File Manager 3 your computer must have Network Scanner Utility 3 installed Note Network Scanner Utility 3 is included in the Software Manual CD ROM When Secondary Ethernet optional is installed on the machine and the IP ...

Page 395: ...e imported In the Passcode field enter a passcode up to 20 digits Note You can also select a folder number from Registered Folders Clicking Select Scanner returns to step 2 where you can reselect a scanner 4 Click Confirm 5 Select a file to be imported from the list To import a file there are two ways as follows Importing a file by clicking Import Click Import The file is extracted and saved the s...

Page 396: ...play of scanner names You can change the display of scanner names listed To change the display of scanner names use the dialog box that appears by clicking Search Display Settings in the scanner selection dialog box Under Scanner Name Display you can change the method in which scanner names are displayed in Scanners Detected Specify scanners to search for under Search Target Settings Note If click...

Page 397: ...shall be borne by you 1 Start up the computer and a web browser 2 Enter the machine s IP address or Internet address in the browser address field and press the Enter key Note If your network uses DNS Domain Name System and the machine s host name is registered in the domain name server you can access the machine using the Internet address with the combination of the host name and the domain name F...

Page 398: ...es Settings in the Properties tab when Name of File s When Retrieved From Folder is set to File Name the file name may be changed automatically when retrieving a file from the folder depending on the file name For more information refer to the online help for CentreWare Internet Services Important To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services users need to have the environment to con...

Page 399: ...ternet The communication fee shall be borne by you Top Frame Displays the model of the machine user information a link to the online help and the tabs links to go to each category Logout is displayed on the right of the user information when you log in as the authenticated user using the Authentication feature or as the System Administrator Click Logout to cancel the Authentication mode or log out...

Page 400: ...e status of the paper trays output trays and consumables such as toner cartridges z Usage Counters Displays the total number of pages used for each feature and cumulative numbers z Total Runtime Displays Output Device Runtime Scanner Runtime Standby Time Low Power Time Sleep Time Warm up Time and Power Off Time by minutes Jobs z Listing active jobs and allowing you to delete the jobs and displayin...

Page 401: ...ting instructions refer to the documentation provided with your browser Port Number The default port number of this service is 80 The port number can be changed in Properties Connectivity Protocols HTTP Usable ports are 1 to 65535 If you set the port to a number other than 80 you must add and the port number after the IP address or the Internet address when entering the address into your browser F...

Page 402: ...he user ID and passcode If communications are encrypted you must specify an address that starts with https instead of http to access CentreWare Internet Services If authentication of the system administrator fails the following message is displayed in the right frame of web browser Login failed If the number of times that authentication fails exceeds the specified number the following message is d...

Page 403: ...ures to change the settings z System Settings Procedure 404 z Tools Menu List 408 z Common Service Settings 420 z Copy Service Settings 457 z Connectivity Network Setup 468 z Print Service Settings 492 z Scan Service Settings 498 z E mail Service Settings 506 z Address Book Settings 509 z Folder Service Settings 510 z Job Flow Service Settings 511 z Media Print Service Settings 512 z Stored File S...

Page 404: ... enter the system administrator User ID If Passcode Entry for Control Panel Login is set to On under Authentication Security Settings Authentication Passcode Policy you need to enter the passcode We recommend that you change the system administrator user ID and passcode immediately after installing the machine For more information on how to change the passcode refer to System Administrator Setting...

Page 405: ...ormation refer to Common Service Settings P 420 Copy Service Settings Allows you to configure the copy service settings such as copy feature defaults copy operation control and button indications For more information refer to Copy Service Settings P 457 Connectivity Network Setup Allows you to configure the network related settings such as ports and protocols For more information refer to Connecti...

Page 406: ...mation refer to Media Print Service Settings P 512 Stored File Settings Allows you to set how to delete files in a folder and print files stored in the machine For more information refer to Stored File Settings P 513 Web Applications Service Setup Allows you to configure a remote access destination server For more information refer to Web Applications Service Setup P 516 Web Browser Setup Allows y...

Page 407: ...in the Tools screen a message may be displayed Follow the message and reboot the machine After the machine reboots it exits from the System Administration mode and the Log In Out button is unlit When you configure settings under System Settings or Setup and then press the Services Home button the screen directly goes back to the Services Home screen Step 6 Exiting System Administration Mode 1 Pres...

Page 408: ...4 z Machine Ready Tone P 424 z Job Complete Tone 1 2 P 424 z Fault Tone P 424 z Auto Clear Alert Tone P 424 z Alert Tone P 424 z Out of Paper Warning Tone P 424 z Low Toner Alert Tone P 425 z Stored Programming Tone P 425 z Stored Programming Complete Tone P 425 Screen Button Settings P 425 z Screen Default P 425 z Screen After Auto Clear P 425 z Auto Display of Login Screen P 425 z Custom Buttons...

Page 409: ...438 z Density Uniformity Adjustment P 438 z Finisher Adjustment P 439 z Adjust Paper Curl P 439 z Software Upgrade P 440 z Delete All Certificates Initialize Settings P 440 z Quick Setup Home P 440 z Register Paper Feeding Positions P 441 z Clean Fusing Unit P 441 z Productivity Mode P 441 Watermark P 441 z Date Format P 442 z Default Watermark Effect P 442 z Default Watermark P 442 z Font Size P ...

Page 410: ...ption P 453 z Encryption Key for Confidential Data P 454 z Service Rep Restricted Operation P 455 z Software Download P 455 z Document Feeder Tray Elevation P 456 z Check Document Guides Position P 456 z Restrict Recipient Selection Method P 456 z Restrict User to Edit Address Book P 456 z Data Indicator P 456 z Ink Setoff Prevention P 456 Copy Tab Features Allocation P 457 Preset Buttons P 458 z ...

Page 411: ...e 2 Sided Original Side 2 P 461 z Image Shift Side 1 P 461 z Image Shift Side 2 P 461 z Image Rotation P 461 z Image Rotation Rotation Direction P 461 z Original Orientation P 461 z Pages per Side P 462 z Copy Output P 462 z Uncollated Default Separator Tray P 462 z Output Destination P 462 z Output Destination Simple Copy P 462 z Face Up Down Output P 462 z Sample Job P 462 z Annotations Stored C...

Page 412: ...ter Center Right Center Bottom Left Bottom Center and Bottom Right P 466 z Date Position Top Left Top Center Top Right Bottom Left Bottom Center and Bottom Right P 466 z Page Number Position Top Left Top Center Top Right Bottom Left Bottom Center and Bottom Right P 466 z Bates Stamp Top Left Top Center Top Right Bottom Left Bottom Center and Bottom Right P 466 z Quantity Display P 466 z Maximum Nu...

Page 413: ...Proxy Server Setup P 478 z Addresses to Bypass Proxy Server P 478 z HTTP Proxy Server Name P 478 z HTTP Proxy Server Port Number P 478 z HTTP Proxy Server Authentication P 478 z HTTP Proxy Server Login Name P 478 z HTTP Proxy Server Password P 478 z HTTPS Proxy Server Name P 478 z HTTPS Proxy Server Port Number P 478 z HTTPS Proxy Server Authentication P 478 z HTTPS Proxy Server Login Name P 478 z...

Page 414: ... Allocate Memory P 492 z ART IV ESC P 201H Form Memory P 492 z HP GL 2 Auto Layout Memory P 492 z Job Ticket Memory P 492 z Receiving Buffer USB P 492 z Receiving Buffer LPD P 492 z Receiving Buffer IPP P 493 z Receiving Buffer Port 9100 P 493 Delete Form P 493 Other Settings P 494 z Print Area P 494 z Substitute Tray P 494 z Paper Type Mismatch P 494 z Unregistered Forms P 495 z Resume Job After ...

Page 415: ...E mail Encryption P 501 z Searchable Text P 501 z Language of the Original P 501 z Searchable Text Compression P 501 z Microsoft Office Format Settings P 501 Scan to PC Defaults P 501 z Transfer Protocol P 501 z Login Credential to Access Destination P 502 z User Name for FTP Scan P 502 Original Size Defaults P 502 Output Size Defaults P 502 Reduce Enlarge Presets P 503 Other Settings P 503 z Memo...

Page 416: ...o edit From if Search Found P 508 z Allow to edit From if Search Failed P 508 z E mail Sending When Search Failed P 508 z Add Me to To Field P 508 z Add Me to Cc Field P 508 z Edit E mail Recipients P 508 Address Book Settings P 509 z Address Book Type P 509 z Directory Service P 509 z Address Book Default Scan P 509 z Search Display Default P 509 Folder Service Settings P 510 z Files Retrieved By...

Page 417: ...P 519 z Use User ID P 519 z User ID P 519 z Password P 519 z Machine Authentication Notification P 519 z Notify User Authorization Information P 519 z Delete All Settings P 519 z Functional Code P 519 Other Settings P 520 z When Sending User Details P 520 Web Browser Setup P 521 z Web Applications Version P 521 z Delete Persistent Cookie Upon Closing P 521 z Clear Cache Upon Closing P 521 z Use Ca...

Page 418: ... 532 z When selecting Server as the address type the following items appear P 533 z Address Type P 533 z E mail Address P 533 z Name P 533 z Index P 533 z Surname P 533 z Given Name P 533 z Custom Item 1 P 533 z Custom Item 2 P 533 z Custom Item 3 P 534 z S MIME Certificate P 534 z Transfer Protocol P 534 z Server Name IP address P 534 z Shared Name SMB Only P 534 z Save in P 534 z User Name P 534...

Page 419: ...ling Information Upon Login P 542 System Administrator Settings P 543 z System Administrator s Login ID P 543 z System Administrator s Passcode P 543 Authentication P 544 z Login Type P 544 z Access Control P 544 z Create View User Accounts P 546 z Reset User Accounts P 546 z Create Authorization Groups P 546 z User Details Setup P 547 z Maximum Login Attempts by System Administrator P 549 z Passc...

Page 420: ...vice Settings For information on how to display the Tools screen refer to System Settings Procedure P 404 2 Select an item to set or change Machine Clock Timers You can set the machine clock or the time intervals of the machine to enter the Power Saver mode or to reset settings Date Set the date in the system clock of the machine The date set here will be printed on all lists and reports 1 Select ...

Page 421: ... automatically When you select On specify a value between 10 and 900 seconds in 1 second increments When you select Off the settings are not reset automatically Note When Off is selected the machine will cancel the standby status and begin processing a document after one minute has elapsed in anticipation of a job command Auto Job Release Specify the time lapsed until the machine cancels the activ...

Page 422: ...us the control panel operation is required The printer lockout duration will not be released even when you switch the power off and then on again or even when you press the Power Saver button while the machine is in the Power Saver mode Low Power mode or Sleep mode The machine starts printing in accordance with the setting in Auto Print when Release Printer is selected Thus the printing may not st...

Page 423: ...0 minutes in 1 minute increments to enter the Low Power mode after the last operation From Last Operation to Sleep Mode Specify a time period between 1 to 240 minutes in 1 minute increments to enter the Sleep mode after the last operation Note Configure the From Last Operation to Sleep Mode time to be same or longer than the From Last Operation to Low Power Mode time The machine enters Sleep mode ...

Page 424: ... To disable the sound select Off Job Complete Tone 1 2 Set the volume to be sounded when a job is completed normally You can select from Soft Normal and Loud To disable the sound select Off You can select the target jobs to play the sound Fault Tone Set the volume to be sounded when a job fails You can select from Soft Normal and Loud To disable the sound select Off You can select the target jobs ...

Page 425: ...entication feature is enabled on the machine set whether or not to automatically display the login screen after turning on the machine or canceling the Power Saver mode Custom Buttons 1 to 3 You can assign services such as Copy and Send from Folder to the custom buttons on the control panel Custom Button 1 to Custom Button 3 To leave a feature unassigned select Not Set Note By factory default the ...

Page 426: ... including double byte characters other than a selected language the characters in the file may be garbled or the import may fail CSV Comma Separated Values is a file format that is often used for saving data by spreadsheets and database programs Screen Brightness You can adjust the screen brightness of the control panel between 16 and 16 Reconfirm E mail Recipient Select whether or not to display...

Page 427: ...sumables status screen at startup When Auto Clear is activated Displays the consumables status screen when Auto Clear is executed Keyboard Input Restriction Allows you to select whether or not to restrict the display of the virtual keyboard of the machine To prevent characters from being garbled when switching character sets you can limit input to ASCII characters If you select On ASCII Only the k...

Page 428: ... O Preview Thumbnailed View Tap to display the entire view O O Flick to switch pages O Drag to switch pages O O Entire View Flick to switch pages O Tap the previous next previewed images to switch pages O O Tap to switch whether to display the page switching buttons or the thumbnailed bar O Double tap to move to enlarged view O Enlarged View Flick the enlarged image to move the position to be disp...

Page 429: ...n the Global IP Address is used and Login Type is set to No Login Required The warning screen is displayed when entering the System Administration mode on the control panel or on the CentreWare Internet Services Select Do Not Display Warning Screen or Display Warning Screen Paper Tray Settings Set the items related to the paper and trays including the type of paper and tray priority Custom Paper S...

Page 430: ...ust transfer voltage by scanning a sample printout for adjustment printed in Select Sample Number For more information on the image transfer adjustment using sample set refer to Adjust Image Transfer Using Sample Printout P 720 When Select Sample Number is selected select from the preset adjustment values between 5 and 10 Adjust Regi Loop If you adjust skew for the pre registration feed you can us...

Page 431: ...ty image Paper jam at the fusing exfoliation part may occur if you increase the temperature too much when printing on a see through paper Note The default value is 0 Confirm the print result by Sample Set when changing the setting Restore the value to the default after printing because the environmental conditions vary Tray Heater This function weakens adhesive of a paper and another by making air...

Page 432: ...sure to use the Post Card Kit Otherwise an error and paper jam occur On the other hand when you load non standard size paper whose length Y is 182 mm or more in the tray be sure to remove the Post Card Kit from the tray Otherwise a paper jam occurs For information on how to attach and remove the Post Card Kit refer to Loading Postcards P 115 z Paper Type Paper Weight You can select the types and w...

Page 433: ...tes screen after the tray is pulled out or inserted in This setting applies to Trays 1 to 3 and 6 optional and 7 optional You cannot apply this setting to Tray 5 Paper Tray Priority Set the priority of the trays to use when paper of the same size and the same orientation is set in the multiple trays or print data does not include the paper tray information for automatic tray selection Auto Paper s...

Page 434: ...aper Tray Priority is selected Targeted Type Weight Copy Jobs You can select paper types and weights Targeted Paper Color Copy Jobs You can target all paper colors or only one paper color Targeted Type Weight Other You can select paper types and weights Targeted Paper Color Other You can target all paper colors or only one paper color Preset Custom Size You can register frequently used settings of...

Page 435: ...f an image Selecting More Photo soften the image gradation of the photo aspects of an image enhancing the reproductivity of subtle colors Background Suppression Color Copy Set the method of background suppression to be used when making color copies Background suppression is the function to detect the density of colors and suppress the scan of background colors when a document has background colors...

Page 436: ...or more information about screen type refer to Executing Calibration P 682 Paper Supply Select a tray Target Select from Copy Print Jobs Copy Jobs Only Print Jobs Only and None Reports You can configure settings related to printing reports Print Reports Button Set the display method of Print Reports under the Machine Information screen and Error History Report under the Faults screen displayed by ...

Page 437: ...ntative visits your place as required Note The EP system may not be available in some regions For more information contact our Customer Support Center Check EP Connection This feature is used to check whether the communications between the machine and our Customer Support Center function normally when the EP system via the Internet is used Note The EP system may not be available in some regions Fo...

Page 438: ...ormation of the smart card appears on the touch screen Note You can register the authentication information using CentreWare Internet Services For more information refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services Important To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services users need to have the environment to connect to the Internet The communication fee shall be borne by you Alignment ...

Page 439: ...er Profiles You can edit profiles of the DFA finisher z Edit DFA Finisher Profile Select to edit a profile Fold Assisting Crease Set the number of additional folding lines between the specified fold line to prevent the output of the folded booklet from opening Select from 1 Crease per Side 2 Creases per Side 3 Creases per Side and No Crease Note The fewer the folding lines the stronger the formati...

Page 440: ...rtant After the downloading is finished the machine automatically restarts and upgrades the software After the machine restarts again and the Services Home screen is displayed the software upgrade is completed Note EP system may not be available in some regions For more information contact our Customer Support Center To use this feature a dedicated contract is needed in addition to a use of the EP...

Page 441: ...nt can be configured to perform more productive printing The following items can be configured Optimize for Image Quality This mode sustains high productivity when paper of the same type and weight is used to print continuously The printer automatically switches the fusing temperature depending on the type and weight of the paper used This mode provides optimum print quality regardless of paper ty...

Page 442: ...ngs assigned to Custom Watermark 1 to 3 For more information about custom text refer to Custom Watermark 1 to 3 P 443 Font Size Set the size of the text to be printed as the Watermark You can set the font size from 24 to 80 points in 1 point increments Background Pattern Set the background pattern to embed the text for the Watermark effect You can select from eight patterns Wave Circle Stripe Chai...

Page 443: ...from a folder The user control number machine ID and date and time are printed Note You can authorize a user to temporarily cancel force watermark printing For more information refer to User Roles and Authorization Groups P 638 The user control number may not be printed depending on the Login mode configuration Force Watermark Media Print Set whether or not to use the Watermark feature when printi...

Page 444: ... about how to enter characters refer to Entering Text P 90 Apply Layout Template to Copy Print Jobs Set the association between jobs and layout templates You can associate layout templates with the following jobs z Copy z Client Print z Print Stored File z Media Print z Print E mail z Report Note You can associate a layout template with Client Print when a print job is sent from a computer You can...

Page 445: ...positions vertically and horizontally from 0 to 100 mm and from 0 to 200 mm respectively in 0 5 mm increments Note 0 mm is at the edge of paper Increasing the value moves the print position toward the center of the paper However for Top Center or Bottom Center the horizontal value for the center of paper is set to 100 mm Therefore when you select Top Center or Bottom Center set the value to 100 mm...

Page 446: ... component is necessary For more information contact our Customer Support Center Offset Stacking Right Middle Tray Offsetting means that each set of copies is delivered to the lower tray and shifted slightly to separate it from the previous job When a set of copies is delivered to the front of the tray the next set is delivered to the rear of the tray Set the offset function for the Right Middle T...

Page 447: ...red For more information contact our Customer Support Center Default Print Paper Size You can set the paper size A4 or 8 5 x 11 to print reports and or lists Paper Size Settings You can specify the size of paper to be automatically detected when you use standard sizes of a document or the machine is set to detect sizes of a document You can select from the following tables A B Series 8 x 13 A B Se...

Page 448: ...O O O O X O O O O O O X O O B6 O X X X X X X O X X X X X X B5 X X O O X O O O O O O X O O B5 X O O O O O O O O O O O O O B4 X O O O X O O O O O O X O O 5 5 8 5 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 7 25 10 5 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 7 25 10 5 O O X X X X X X X X X X X X 8 10 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 8 10 X X X X X O O X X X X X O O 8 5 11 X O O X X O O X O O X X O O 8 5 11 O O O X O O O X O O X O O O ...

Page 449: ... X X 4 6 X X X O X X X X X X X X X X Photo 2L 5 x 7 X X X O X X X X X X X X X X DT special A3 X X O X X X X X X O X X X X DT special A4 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X DT special A4 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O X Available Not available Paper size group A B series 8 13 A B series Loading position Size Orientation Document glass Document feeder Trays 1 2 and 3 Tray 5 Bypass HCF B1 HCF B1 S High Capaci...

Page 450: ... X X O X X X X X X B5 O O O O X O O O X O O X O O B5 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O B4 O O O O X O O O O O O X O O 5 5 8 5 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 7 25 10 5 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 7 25 10 5 X X X X X X X X O X X X X X 8 10 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 8 10 X X X X X O O X X X X X X O 8 5 11 X O O X X O O O O O X X O O 8 5 11 O O O X O O O O O O X O O O 8 5 13 X X O X X O O O O O O X O O 8 5 1...

Page 451: ...4 6 X X X X X O O X X X O X X X Photo 2L 5 7 X X X X X X X X X X O X X X DT special A3 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X DT special A4 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X DT special A4 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O X Available Not available Paper size group A B series 8 K 16 K A B series 8 13 8 14 Loading position Size Orientation Document glass Document feeder Tray 1 2 and 3 Tray 5 Bypass HCF B1 HCF B1 S High ...

Page 452: ...O X O O O A3 O O O X X O O B6 X X X X X X X B5 X X O O X O O B5 X O X X X O O B4 X O O X X O O 5 5 8 5 O O O O X X X 7 25 10 5 X X X X X X X 7 25 10 5 O O O X O O O 8 10 X X O X X X X 8 10 X X X X X O O 8 5 11 O O O X O X X 8 5 11 O O O O O O O 8 5 13 X X O X X O O 8 5 14 O O O O X O O 11 15 X X X X X X X 11 17 O O O O X O O Cover A4 X X X X X X X A4 Tab Stock X X X X X X X 9 11 X X X X X X X 8 5 ...

Page 453: ...eature set an encryption key 1 Select Data Encryption and then Change Settings 2 Select On 3 Select New Encryption Key and enter an encryption key of 1 to 12 single byte characters and then select Save 12 6 19 2 X X X X X O O 13 18 O X O X X O O 13 19 O X O X X O O 16 K X X X X X X X 16 K X X X X X X X 8 K X X X X X X X Postcard 4 6 X X X X X X X Return postcard X X X X X X X 4 6 O X X O X O O Pho...

Page 454: ...dure is recommended for changing the encryption settings while a large amount of data 100 jobs or more is stored in a folder and Number of Overwrites is set to 1 Overwrite or 3 Overwrites under Overwrite Hard Disk 1 Select Tools Setup Create Folder to display the Create Folder screen 2 Select the folder and then select Delete Folder 3 Select Close 4 Press the Machine Status button and confirm that...

Page 455: ...52 z Creating Changing Users with System Administrator Rights z Changing SNMP v3 Setting When On is set you can set a maintenance passcode of 4 to 12 digits in the Maintenance Passcode screen Entering the passcode is required when our service representative performs maintenance Important When On is set note the followings If you lose the system administrator s user ID and passcode the items restri...

Page 456: ...ict User to Edit Address Book Specify whether or not to permit local users to add and edit recipients in the Address Book When you select Yes local users cannot add or edit the Address Book Note You can also give users authority to deactivate Restrict User to Edit Address Book For more information refer to User Roles and Authorization Groups P 638 Data Indicator Allows you to set the lighting patt...

Page 457: ...ber of features displayed on the Copy screen 5 Features The following five features are shown on the screen Output Color Reduce Enlarge Paper Supply 2 Sided Copying and Copy Output Features and positions displayed cannot be changed 7 Features Allows you to set features appearing in the fourth column from the left of the Copy screen Note Output Color Reduce Enlarge and Paper Supply cannot be specif...

Page 458: ...e of the separator handout tray displayed in Transparency Options on the Output Format screen Copy Defaults You can set the default settings of the Copy feature When the machine is turned on or the machine exits the Power Saver mode or when the Clear All button is pressed the machine resets to the default values set here Setting frequently used features and values as the defaults can avoid extra o...

Page 459: ...om colors For information about custom colors refer to Custom Colors P 467 Dual Color Non target Area Color Set the default value for Non target Area Color that appears when Dual Color is selected for More of Output Color in the Copy screen You can select a color from seven preset colors and six custom colors For information about custom colors refer to Custom Colors P 467 Original Type Set the de...

Page 460: ...screen is set to Advanced Color Color Shift Set the default value for Color Shift in the Image Quality screen 2 Sided Copying Set the default value for 2 Sided Copying in the Copy Layout Adjustment and Output Format screens Mixed Size Originals Set the default value for Mixed Size Originals in the Layout Adjustment screen Edge Erase Top Edge When you copy a document with the document cover open or...

Page 461: ...nnot copy the whole area even if you set 0 to Edge Erase Right Edge For the printable area refer to Printable Area P 928 Center Erase Binding Edge Erase When you copy a document with the document cover open or when you copy a book the edges and center margin of the document may be printed as black shadows This feature allows you to erase such shadows on the center of facing pages of a bound docume...

Page 462: ...creen is displayed you can confirm the output destination on the Review screen which is displayed by pressing the Review button For information on the Review button refer to Control Panel P 74 Face Up Down Output Set the default value for Face Up Down Output in the Output Format screen Sample Job Set the default value for Sample Job in the Job Assembly screen Annotations Stored Comment Set the def...

Page 463: ...elected for Annotations in the Output Format screen Bates Stamp Position on Side 1 and Side 2 Set the default value for Position displayed when Bates Stamp is selected for Annotations in the Output Format screen Bates Stamp Font Size Set the default value for Font Size under Font Size displayed when Bates Stamp is selected for Annotations in the Output Format screen Tab Margin Shift Shift Value Se...

Page 464: ...r sides 1 and 2 Important When the side 1 and side 2 are different sizes and if the side 2 is copied on the sheet on which the side 1 has been printed a part of the image may be missing Copy to new sheet Side 2 is copied as side 1 on a new sheet of paper Copy to Side 2 Side 2 is copied on the reverse side of side 1 without changing paper size Fine tune 100 You can fine tune magnification when copy...

Page 465: ...der under Face Up Down Output in the Output Format screen Face Up Down Auto Single Sheet Specify the operation of the machine when Face Up Down Output is set to Auto in the Output Format screen and a single sheet is output Default Trim Margin Set the default value for the amount of edge trimmed from the output of a booklet When you specify trimming the machine trims the fore edge of a booklet oppo...

Page 466: ...print a bates stamp finely Quantity Display You can select how you want to display the counter in the Copy service Select from Quantity Quantity and Memory and Quantity and Original Count Maximum Number of Sets Set the maximum number of allowed sets to copy between 1 and 9999 Users will not be able to specify a larger number of sets to copy than the value set here Sample Output to Stacker Top Tray...

Page 467: ...o the Reduce Enlarge Preset buttons other than 100 and Auto Custom Colors Set the custom colors used for Single Color and Dual Color in the Output Color screen You can assign custom colors with yellow 0 to 100 magenta 0 to 100 and cyan 0 to 100 to each custom color buttons 1 to 6 Note Adjust so that the total of yellow magenta and cyan does not exceed 240 Annotations Create Comments Register text ...

Page 468: ...d HTTP SSL TLS do not use a number that is the same as a port number of another port For a port that uses HTTP IPP Internet Services HTTP UPnP Discovery SOAP WebDAV and Web Services on Devices WSD do not use a number that is the same as a port number of LPD Port9100 and HTTP SSL TLS Furthermore if any of the above are set to one of the port numbers indicated below operation may no longer be perfor...

Page 469: ...nt sessions using LPD You can enter a number from 1 to 10 in 1 session increments The default value is 5 SMB Client Port Status Select Enabled to use SMB when you use the Scan to PC SMB service or SMB authentication service IPP Port Status Select Enabled to use IPP Set this when you want to use IPP Internet Printing Protocol to print via the Internet Added Port Number Select Disabled when you want...

Page 470: ...an to PC service with FTP transmission Note Select a communication mode to send data scanned via FTP from Passive Mode and Active Mode Active Mode is selected by factory default You can change the setting from CentreWare Internet Services Receive E mail Port Status Select Enabled when you receive e mails Send E mail Port Status Select Enabled when you send e mails E mail Notification Service Port ...

Page 471: ... search a device on a network from Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows 8 1 Windows Server 2012 and Windows Server 2012 R2 Port Number Enter a port number from 1 to 65535 The default value is 80 Important Do not use a number that is the same as a port number of another port However you can use the same port number for a port that uses HTTP IPP Internet Services HTTP UPnP Discovery SOAP WebDAV...

Page 472: ...nd Operation Time Out enable port status and reboot the machine and then configure Port Number and Operation Time Out Port Number Enter a port number for WebDAV from 1 to 65535 The default value is 80 Important Do not use a number that is the same as a port number of another port However you can use the same port number for a port that uses HTTP PP Internet Services HTTP UPnP Discovery SOAP WebDAV...

Page 473: ...iguration When single Ethernet interface is used Ethernet Rated Speed is displayed When two Ethernet interfaces are used Ethernet 1 Rated Speed and Ethernet 2 Rated Speed are displayed z Auto Select this to detect the Ethernet transmission rate automatically z 100 Mbps Full Duplex Select this to set 100BASE TX Full Duplex as the default value z 100 Mbps Half Duplex Select this to set 100BASE TX Ha...

Page 474: ...thernet 2 are displayed For TCP IP Network Settings Ethernet 1 and TCP IP Network Settings Ethernet 2 same setting items as TCP IP Network Settings are displayed You can configure individual settings for each Ethernet interface When any interface names are specified in Ethernet1 Network Name and Ethernet2 Network Name the specified names are displayed instead of Ethernet1 and Ethernet2 of TCP IP N...

Page 475: ...atically obtain the address of the DNS server from the DHCP server z Preferred DNS Server IP Address Alternate DNS Server 1 IP Address Alternate DNS Server 2 IP Address When Get IP Address from DHCP is set to Disabled manually set the DNS server address Specify alternate DNS server addresses for Alternate DNS Server 1 IP Address and Alternate DNS Server 2 IP Address IPv4 IP Filter Select whether o...

Page 476: ...lternate DNS server addresses for Alternate DNS Server 1 IP Address and Alternate DNS Server 2 IP Address Automatically Configured IPv6 Address Displays the following addresses which are automatically assigned z Link local address z Auto Stateless Address 1 and Prefix Length z Auto Stateless Address 2 and Prefix Length z Auto Stateless Address 3 and Prefix Length z Auto Gateway Address IPv6 IP Fil...

Page 477: ...r the E mail address of the machine with up to 128 single byte characters When receiving E mail via SMTP You can set any name for the account on the left side of Set the address section on the right side of with the combination of the host name and domain name An alias cannot be set For Example mymail myhost example com z Account name mymail z Host name myhost z Domain Name example com When receiv...

Page 478: ...et the HTTP proxy server port number from 1 to 65535 The default value is 8080 Important Do not use the numbers assigned to the other ports HTTP Proxy Server Authentication Select Enabled when authentication is required to connect to the HTTP proxy server HTTP Proxy Server Login Name Enter a login name of the HTTP proxy server Up to 31 characters are allowed HTTP Proxy Server Password Enter a pass...

Page 479: ...6 address and FQDN HTTPS Proxy Server Port Number Set the HTTPS proxy server port number from 1 to 65535 The default value is 8080 Important Do not use the numbers assigned to the other ports HTTPS Proxy Server Authentication Select Enabled when authentication is required to connect to the HTTPS proxy server HTTPS Proxy Server Login Name Enter a login name of the HTTPS proxy server Up to 31 charac...

Page 480: ... Polling Interval Set the interval for checking the e mail on the POP3 server from 1 to 120 minutes in 1 minute increments Login Name Enter the name to login to the POP3 server with up to 64 characters Password Enter a password for the POP3 server with up to 64 characters Enter the same password in New Password and Retype Password using the numeric keypad displayed by selecting Keyboard If you do ...

Page 481: ...entication SMTP AUTH Login Name Enter the user name for verification purposes at the SMTP server with up to 64 characters SMTP AUTH Password Enter the password for verification purposes at the SMTP server Up to 64 single byte characters are allowed Note If you do not set the password leave the text boxes blank and select Save Remote Authentication Directory Service You can make the settings for th...

Page 482: ...m 1 to 65535 The default value is 88 Important Do not use the numbers assigned to the other ports Domain Name When you use Active Directory of Windows 2000 Server Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2012 as server specify the domain name of Active Directory in Domain Name Up to 64 characters are allowed Important Enter a realm name in uppercase characters Otherwise an authent...

Page 483: ... the attribute of the user ID entered Up to 32 characters are allowed Set the attribute of the User Attribute information registered on the LDAP server that corresponds to the value to be entered as the user name from the control panel For example when you want a user to enter the mail address set mail Attribute of Login User Name Enter an attribute to be used for LDAP authentication using User At...

Page 484: ...ser and System Login Name Set a user name for the Address Book search and access the directory server using Authentication of User Attributes method for LDAP authentication Set this item only when authentication is required for the search for the directory service Up to 255 characters are allowed Password Set a login password for the user specified in Login Name Up to 32 characters are allowed Sea...

Page 485: ...the LDAP server Up to 32 characters are allowed For Windows enter mail for an attribute name used as e mail information Attribute Type of Custom Items 1 2 and 3 Set the LDAP attribute type of custom items 1 to 3 In addition to Attribute Type of Name and Attribute Type of E mail Address you can assign user attributes registered on the LDAP server for a search Up to 32 characters are allowed Attribu...

Page 486: ...ss of the SMB server specification method selected for SMB Server Setup Important Use the NetBIOS or Active Directory domain name for the domain name Server Name IP Address Enter the server name or IP address This setting is valid when SMB Server Setup is set to By Domain Server Names IP Address Important Use the NetBIOS computer name or full computer name with DNS suffix for the server name For I...

Page 487: ...LS If the verification fails the machine cannot perform communication z SSL TLS The machine communicates in SSL TLS ThinPrint SSL TLS Communication Select whether or not to enable the SSL TLS communications Device Certificate Client Select a certificate for HTTP SSL TLS communications Verify Remote Server Certificate When the machine is operated as an SSL client select whether or not to verify the...

Page 488: ...om an address registered on the Address Book PDF DocuWorks XPS Signature Settings Configure signature settings of PDF DocuWorks XPS documents Note XPS stands for XML Paper Specification Device Certificate Select a certificate to use for the signature For more information on the certificate refer to Encryption and Digital Signature Settings P 603 PDF Signature Select the setting for PDF signature f...

Page 489: ...d is set to Authenticate by Digital Signature A self signed certificate created by CentreWare Internet Services cannot be used For more information on a certificate refer to Types of Certificate P 604 z IPSec Communication Select whether or not to enable IPSec communications z IKE SA Life Time Specify IKE SA lifetime from 5 to 28800 minutes in 1 minute increments Note The value must be greater tha...

Page 490: ... login user name with up to 128 characters z Login Password Enter the login password with up to 128 characters z Server Certificate Verification Select whether or not to verify a server certificate when PEAP MS CHAPv2 is selected in Authentication Method Certificate Revocation Retrieval Settings Configure the settings for certificate revocation retrieval Level of Certificate Verification Select a ...

Page 491: ...ork related items Protocol to Receive E mail Select from SMTP and POP3 depending on your environment Add Domain Name to User Name Select whether or not to add domain names to user names Output Destination for E mail Specify an output destination for e mail print Selecting Auto enables the machine to select the output destination which is set as the default output destination Domain Filtering Set t...

Page 492: ...the machine on and the size set exceeds the total memory size the system automatically adjusts the memory size Note When a port is set to Disabled the corresponding items to the port do not appear Depending on the amount of data sent from the client increasing the memory capacity may not change the time taken to release the client ART IV ESC P 201H Form Memory Displays where to save forms for use ...

Page 493: ...iving Buffer IPP No Spooling Does not use spooling While IPP printing is performed for one client data cannot be received over the same interface from another client Specify a value for the dedicated IPP receiving buffer memory capacity from 64 to 1024 KB in 32 KB increments Spool to Hard Disk Carries out spooling The receiving buffer for spooling uses the hard disk Receiving Buffer Port 9100 Set ...

Page 494: ...per to previously selected and prints If necessary the image is automatically reduced in size on the paper Note If there is a client specification the client specification is prioritized Select Tray 5 Prints using the paper loaded in Tray 5 Paper Type Mismatch Set an action to take when the paper type loaded in the paper tray does not match the paper type specified when a print job is submitted No...

Page 495: ...interrupt button to suspend printing temporarily will not work When Paper Jam Occurs Specify how the machine handles print jobs after a paper jam is cleared Resume Job after Jam Clearance When a paper jam is cleared the machine automatically resumes printing from the next page of the page which was output correctly Delete Job The machine cancels printing and removes the print job Note For print fi...

Page 496: ...hine processes the print tickets written in XPS documents Note XPS stands for XML Paper Specification Off Does not process print tickets Standard Mode Uses the standard mode to process print tickets Compatible Mode Uses the Microsoft compliant mode to process print tickets LPD Print Queue Set the LPD print sequence Note If you change the LPD Print Queue setting the Receiving Buffer LPD setting may...

Page 497: ... machine converts the paper type and weight and executes the print job You can set the paper weight for each supported paper type The following table shows the correspondence between the print driver setting and the supported paper types Print Driver Setting Supported Paper Type Paper Weight Default Available Paper Weight Plain Uncoated 81 90 gsm 52 63 gsm 64 80 gsm 81 90 gsm 91 105 gsm 106 135 gs...

Page 498: ...Store to Folder tab of the Store to Folder service z The Network Scanning tab of the Network Scanning service z The Scan to PC tab of the Scan to PC service z The Store Send Link tab of the Store Send Link service z The Store to USB tab of the Store to USB service Email Screen Default Set the default screen that appears when E mail on the Services Home screen is selected Select from First Tab and ...

Page 499: ... Color Scanning Set the default value for Color Scanning in the First Tab Original Type Set the default value for Original Type in the First Tab File Format Set the default value for File Format in the First Tab Optimize PDF For Quick Web View Set the default value for Optimize For Quick Web View of File Format in the First Tab Thumbnail Outgoing E mail For the E mail feature set the default value...

Page 500: ...e default value for Mixed Size Originals in the Layout Adjustment screen Edge Erase Set the default value for Edge Erase in the Layout Adjustment screen You can select from All Edges and Parallel Edges Edge Erase Top Bottom Edges Set the default value for Top Bottom in Edge Erase in the Layout Adjustment screen Specify a value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments Edge Erase Left Right Edges Set the ...

Page 501: ...xt on a document Note An optional component is required to use this feature For more information contact our Customer Support Center Searchable Text Compression Set whether or not to compress searchable text when using the OCR feature Note An optional component is required to use this feature For more information contact our Customer Support Center Microsoft Office Format Settings Set the default ...

Page 502: ...me Original Size Defaults Set the document size displayed in Original Size in the Layout Adjustment screen You can assign a document size to each of the 17 buttons other than Auto Detect If you frequently use non standard size paper for scanning assigning the paper sizes to the buttons will save your time to specify the size each time A B Series Size You can select a size from sizes of A and B ser...

Page 503: ... hard disk memory while scanning a document a screen appears asking you how you want to handle the partially stored data Set the process you want the machine to perform for the partially stored data after a certain time has elapsed in the confirmation screen Youcansetthetimeuntilthememoryfullprocedureiscarriedout Formoreinformation referto AutoJobRelease P 421 Delete Job Deletes the data partially...

Page 504: ...e at End of Scanning Displays a scan completion message Display Scan Transfer Screens Displays the transfer screen after scan completion The scan completion message is not displayed Display Message at End of Transfer Displays a transfer completion message Filename Format For the Store to Folder Store to USB Scan to PC and Store Send Link services you can select the file name format You can select ...

Page 505: ...ct our Customer Support Center URL File Expiration Set the retention period for files stored with the Store Send Link feature You can specify a value from 1 to 168 hours in 1 hour increments The default value is 3 hours Generation of URL Link Set the format of URLs generated with the Store Send Link feature Select either Use IP Address or Use FQDN The following are examples of URLs If Use IP Addre...

Page 506: ...ddress of the machine is received you can select the print operation Print Attachment Only Only prints the attached documents Attachment Full Headers Message Prints the e mail headers and body of e mails When you select Attachment Full Headers Message with S MIME Info S MIME Information is also printed Attachment Basic Headers Message Prints the part of headers From To Subject Date and the content...

Page 507: ...less of success or failure of the transmission Print when delivery fails Prints only when the transmission failed Split Send Method Set the default value for the mail split method Split into Pages Splits into pages Split by Data Size Splits by the data size set in Maximum Data Size per E mail Maximum Data Size per E mail Set the upper limit of the data size for splitting mail Specify a value from ...

Page 508: ...earch Failed Set whether to protect e mail addresses from being changed under From on the E mail tab when a login user fails to retrieve an e mail address E mail Sending When Search Failed Set whether or not to disable the E mail service when a login user fails to retrieve an e mail address Add Me to To Field Set whether or not to automatically add the sender s address to the To field Add Me to Cc...

Page 509: ...ss book stored on the directory server Even when Enabled is selected the address book of the directory server will not be started unless the following conditions are satisfied z The IP address of the machine must be set z The IP address or Internet address of the directory server primary must be set z The port numbers used for LDAP communication must be set on the directory server and the machine ...

Page 510: ...lder and when a file is retrieved by a client the retrieved file is forcibly deleted File Display Default Set the display method of the file list screen Select from List or Thumbnail Orientation for Stored Print Jobs Set the orientation of non standard size documents to be stored in a folder Select Portrait or Landscape Even when Portrait is selected a print job whose orientation is not available ...

Page 511: ...e for the machine Pool Server Leave the default setting unchanged Pool Server Login Method Leave the default setting unchanged Job Flow Sheet List Default Set the default values for Save in Owner and Target of Job flow sheets which are displayed when you select Job Flow Sheets on the Services Home screen Save in Leave the default setting unchanged Owner Select the owner of job flow sheets from Adm...

Page 512: ...ature is called the Media Print feature Note An optional component is required to use this feature For more information contact our Customer Support Center XPS stands for XML Paper Specification 1 On the Tools screen select Media Print Service Settings For the method of displaying the Tools screen refer to System Settings Procedure P 404 2 Select an item to set or change Text Paper Supply Button 2...

Page 513: ...utes Note When you select 24 Hour Clock in Common Service Settings Machine Clock Timers Time set the deletion time from 0 to 23 hours and 00 to 59 minutes Toautomatically delete filesatthe time specifiedhere you need toset Delete ExpiredFiles to Yes For more information refer to Delete Expired Files P 524 Stored Job Expiration Date You can set whether or not to automatically delete print files Cha...

Page 514: ...for Preview Generation Set whether or not to restrict time to generate a preview image of the print files When you select No Limit preview images are generated within no time restriction When you select Limited only the preview images generated in the specified duration are displayed In the case of exceeding the time limit no preview image will be generated Specify the time limit between 10 and 90...

Page 515: ...Stored File Settings 515 Tools 13 File Name Ascending Prints files in ascending order by file name File Name Descending Prints files in descending order by file name ...

Page 516: ...ificate verification is available to prevent phishing attempts as with a Windows web browser Configure the following settings Preparations Download a root certificate CA certificate of the root certification authority which issues the server certificate for the remote server to be connected to a computer connected to CentreWare Internet Services The CA certificate formats that can be used are as f...

Page 517: ...by clicking the Browse button 7 Click the Import button After a short while Settings have been changed is displayed 8 Refresh the web browser to reload CentreWare Internet Services 5 Confirm that the certificate has been imported Otherwise proceed to step 6 1 Click Certificate Management 2 Select Trusted Certificate Authorities for Category and then click the Display the list button 3 Select the c...

Page 518: ...f a web application that is set in Web Applications Version of Web Browser Setup P 521 For example z http www example com z http 192 0 2 1 IPv4 z http 2001 DB8 1234 IPv6 z https www example com z https 192 0 2 1 IPv4 z https 2001 DB8 1234 IPv6 When you connect the server specifying the version of the web application to be used enter the version after the protocol type The setting made here takes p...

Page 519: ...ser ID may be invalid Check the settings on the remote service Note Along with User ID set also Password User ID will be invalid unless Password is set All the specified settings are ignored if the remote service to be connected requires other than a user ID and its password for authentication Password Enter the password for the User ID with up to 128 characters Machine Authentication Notification...

Page 520: ...firmation screen when the machine send user authorization information authorized User ID password e mail address and the services restricted to the remote server Note Even when you select No Confirmation Required if there is a flaw in the authentication information a confirmation screen is displayed ...

Page 521: ...ngs Procedure P 404 2 Select an item to set or change Web Applications Version Select a version of the Web applications service from V2 V4 or V5 Important If V2 is selected the following settings become invalid Delete Persistent Cookie Upon Closing Clear Cache Upon Closing Use Cache Accept Cookies Use TLS1 0 Use SSL3 0 When SSL Certificate Verification Fails and Enable File Printing Note When you ...

Page 522: ...le Printing feature The File Printing feature allows you to directly print the printable files obtained from the remote Web server Functional Code Set the functional code as necessary when you use a service which works in Versant 80 Press Specify the value between 0 and 65535 ...

Page 523: ...der via e mail or retrieve a file stored in a computer on a network You can create a private folder and a public folder in the machine and use them separately depending on your purpose You can create up to 500 folders You can check the current folders in a Folder List For more information refer to Folder List P 626 1 Select Create Folder 2 Select the folder to create Note Entering a 3 digit folder...

Page 524: ...ions A passcode entry is required when a folder is selected or a file in a folder is printed or deleted z Save Write A passcode entry is required when a folder is selected z Print Delete Read A passcode entry is required when printing or deleting the file in the folder Delete Files After Retrieval When a file stored in a folder is printed or is retrieved from a remote server set whether the file s...

Page 525: ...automatically starts When the Delete Folder Button is Selected Selecting this button deletes the selected folder Any files stored in the folder are also deleted If Login Type is set to No Login Required all the job flow sheets including a local user created on the Create Folder screen or job flow sheets created on the Send from Folder screen are deleted as well Important Once files or job flow she...

Page 526: ... to a specific folder The Authentication feature restricts the use of the job flows For information on the available Job Flow features and restrictions on use refer to Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Folders P 647 1 Select Create Job Flow Sheet 2 Carry out the job flow operation in accordance with your purpose Sheet Filtering You can filter the job flow sheets to display Select the filterin...

Page 527: ...ormation about how to enter characters refer to Entering Text P 90 Select Keyword Displays the Select Keyword screen Select a keyword registered in the System Settings to search for job flows Job flows that fully match the entry are searched The machine searches through keywords that were registered upon each job flow creation For information on the keyword registry refer to Create Job Flow Sheet ...

Page 528: ... mail address specified Subject Enter a subject using the keyboard displayed Delete Recipient Deletes all information for the selected recipient information Edit Displays the Edit Recipient screen which allows you to check or change the recipient selected For more information on the Edit Recipient screen refer to Scan P 215 File Format Select an output file format For more information on the File ...

Page 529: ...set the number of resend attempts and interval z Resend Attempts Set the transmission retry count from 1 to 5 z Resend Interval Set the transmission retry interval from 30 to 300 seconds Name Server Save in User Name and Password Select Name Server Save in User Name or Password to display an input screen The numbers of characters you can input are as follows z Name Up to 18 single byte characters ...

Page 530: ...byte characters z Save in Up to 128 single byte characters z User Name For domain users up to 97 characters with the format of user name domain name or domain name user name user name and domain name must be up to 32 and 64 single byte characters respectively For local users up to 32 single byte characters z Password Up to 32 single byte characters Print Configure print settings When On is selecte...

Page 531: ...cipient selected For more information on the Edit Recipient screen refer to Scan P 215 Close Menu Deselects the selected item Edit Delete You can check the content of a job flow sheet and edit copy or delete it Note Some operations may be restricted according to types of job flow owners authentication settings and user types For more information refer to Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Fold...

Page 532: ...o display the Add Address Book Entry screen press the Log In Out button and enter the system administrator s user ID and then select Tools Setup Add Address Book Entry If Setup is displayed on the Services Home screen select Setup Add Address Book Entry When users are prohibited from editing the Address Book in the System Administration mode Add Address Book Entry cannot be selected in Setup on th...

Page 533: ...s For information about how to enter characters refer to Entering Text P 90 Given Name Enter a recipient given name with up to 32 single byte characters For information about how to enter characters refer to Entering Text P 90 Custom Item 1 The attribute name set as Attribute Name of Custom Item 1 is shown as the item name By factory default the item name is set to Telephone Number You can input a...

Page 534: ... certificate in a screen displayed To remove a link select Remove Certificate Important If a certificate linked to an S MIME certificate in the Address Book is deleted by some reasons such as hard disk initialization and the deletion of the certificate the certificate linked to the S MIME certificate will be invalid Even if you re register the S MIME certificate you have to manually link it again ...

Page 535: ...e com is a domain name z For Windows NT domains Domain name User name Domain name up to 64 characters User name up to 32 characters For example example fuji example is a domain name and fuji is a user name z For workgroups Local user up to 32 characters For example Fuji Taro Password Set a password when the forwarding destination server prompts a password entry You can enter up to 32 single byte c...

Page 536: ...The settings described here are identical with Create View User Accounts under Authentication of Authentication Security Settings Important Before registering users refer to Accounting Type P 540 and set the Accounting Type you use Note This item does not appear when Network Accounting is selected in Accounting Type P 540 1 Select Create View User Accounts 2 Select a User ID for which you want to ...

Page 537: ...hine use When the smart card reader is connected you can select the settings for each Login Type Disabled Prohibits the machine use Service Access You can place restrictions on the use and the maximum number of allowed pages for each of the Copy Scan and Print services 1 Select Service Access 2 Select a feature to restrict 3 To set account limits select Change Account Limit and then enter the maxi...

Page 538: ...e for a user z User No special authority is given to this user role z System Administrator The same authority as a system administrator is given except for the following operation Operate folders Operate job flow sheets Change the passcode of the system administrator z Account Administrator The following authorities are given Create delete change except for passcode and view unavailable depending ...

Page 539: ...er Account or Group Account If you select User Account select also the User ID to check 3 Click Account Details Reset User Accounts You can delete all registered information for all registered users in a single operation or reset the auditron data It is also available to print contents for confirmation before resetting The settings described here are identical with Reset User Accounts under Authen...

Page 540: ...tents registered information to reset or a report including contents administration data to reset The report is available for confirmation before resetting Reset Deletes or resets the data for the selected item System Administrator s Meter Copy Jobs You can check or reset the total impression copied using the System Administration mode on the screen The total impressions are counted up to 9 999 99...

Page 541: ... information used for authentication Note Account ID is used for accounting z Display User ID Account ID Prompts Prompts users to enter both their user ID and Account ID z Display User ID Prompt Only Prompts users to enter their user ID only z Display Account ID Prompt Only Prompts users to enter their Account ID only z Display No Prompts Does not prompt users to enter their user ID or Account ID ...

Page 542: ...wn on the screen Use this feature to enhance security as required Note This item is displayed when Network Accounting is selected in Accounting Type Show As you enter the Account ID the characters are echoed on the screen in the normal way Hide As you enter the Account ID the character string is hidden as a row of asterisks Display Billing Information Upon Login You can set whether to display bill...

Page 543: ...the system administrator s user ID Enter the ID from 1 to 32 single byte characters Note The default of the system administrator s user ID is 11111 1 Select System Administrator s Login ID 2 Select On 3 Select Keyboard 4 Enter the system administrator s ID with up to 32 characters and then select Save 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to re enter the same system administrator s ID in Re enter System Administ...

Page 544: ...rmation registered on the machine Note When Login to Local Accounts is selected the machine enters the Login mode and Login is displayed at the lower left of the Services Home screen Login to Remote Accounts Authenticates users based on the user information registered on a remote authentication server Note When Login to Remote Accounts is selected the machine enters the Login mode and Login is dis...

Page 545: ...D and Network Scanning services and features on the machine If a stored programming contains steps to use the Scan services the use of the store programming is also restricted Note WSD stands for Web services on Devices z Media Print Text Restricts access to the Media Print Text service on the machine z Media Print Photos Restricts access to the Media Print Photos service on the machine z Send fro...

Page 546: ...tron data It is also available to print contents for confirmation before resetting The settings described here are identical with Reset User Accounts under Accounting Refer to Reset User Accounts P 539 Create Authorization Groups System administrators can give login users authority to use some features that are restricted for login users The login users can be divided into different authorization ...

Page 547: ...lure count to detect unauthorized access An error is logged if authentication fails the number of times specified here within a predetermined time 10 minutes Logout Confirmation Screen Set whether or not to display a logout confirmation screen every time a user session ends User ID for Login Set whether or not to make the user ID entry field on the user login screen case sensitive When you select ...

Page 548: ... Extensible Customization Function is set to be enabled For more information on Extensible Customization Function refer to Passcode Setting for Extended Functions P 978 Smart Card Link Mode Set whether or not to require a passcode for smart card authentication Smart Card Certificate Verification Set whether or not to verify the smart card certificate when a user uses the smart card When Enabled is...

Page 549: ... and Passcode setting for Create View User Accounts Selecting Off does not require the passcode even if a passcode is set in the above settings Important The setting of Passcode Entry for Control Panel Login is used for authentication on the machine A passcode must always be entered when accessing from remote devices using CentreWare Internet Services or the like regardless of the use of passcode ...

Page 550: ...o apply to jobs 4 Select Save after the setting is completed According to Print Auditron Specifies how print jobs should be handled when the Authentication and Accounting features are enabled and Print under Service Access is set to Locked Note When the Authentication and Accounting features are disabled and Print under Service Access is set to Unlocked the settings specified in the print driver a...

Page 551: ... Job on the machine when you select as follows on CentreWare Internet Services Properties Security Authentication Configuration Non Account Print When Job without User ID is set to Save as Charge Print Job or Delete Job the Non account Print check box on CentreWare Internet Services is deselected automatically z Non PJL Command Job s Set how to handle the job that does not have a PJL command The j...

Page 552: ...orce Watermark refer to Watermark P 441 For more information about Print Universal Unique ID refer to Print Universal Unique ID P 445 For settings of authorization group refer to Authentication and Accounting Features P 637 Job Status Default You can hide active jobs completed jobs and job logs from unauthenticated users or non job owners to protect privacy and prevent leakage of confidential info...

Page 553: ...em administrator s user ID and passcode are forgotten the machine configuration will not be able to recover in case of malfunction z Set Passcode Entry for Control Panel Login to On z Set Maximum Login Attempts by System Administrator to 5 times z Note that the hard disk security will not be warranted if you do not correctly follow the above setting instructions For more information on how to set ...

Page 554: ...he passcode and encryption key according to the following rules Do not use easily assured character string Use both characters and numerics For more information on encryption key refer to Encryption Key for Confidential Data P 454 ...

Page 555: ...tings This chapter describes how to set up CentreWare Internet Services z Installation of CentreWare Internet Services 556 z Starting CentreWare Internet Services 557 z Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare Internet Services 558 ...

Page 556: ...1 Select Connectivity Network Setup 2 Select Port Settings 3 Select Internet Services HTTP and then select Change Settings 4 Select Port Status and then select Change Settings 5 Select Enabled and then select Save 6 Select Close repeatedly until the Tools screen is displayed 3 Set an IP address If an IP address is already set you can skip this step For an environment with DHCP or BOOTP configure t...

Page 557: ...host name and the domain name For example if the host name is myhost and the domain name is example com then the Internet address is myhost example com When specifying a port number add and the port number after the Internet address If using the Authentication feature on the machine enter a user ID and passcode in the User Name and Password fields If you are not sure about the user ID and passcode...

Page 558: ...y the online help for CentreWare Internet Services users need to have the environment to connect to the internet The communication fee shall be borne by you Item How to Select Overview Reference Usage Counters Select from Status tab Counters Displays the total number of pages printed for each service Total Runtime Select from Status tab Displays the cumulative time of runtime printing or scanning ...

Page 559: ...to Port Settings P 468 Physical Connections Refer to Port Settings P 468 Protocols Refer to Protocol Settings P 473 Language Emulations Select from Properties tab Services Printing Refer to Print Mode P 629 Scan Service Common Settings Select from Properties tab Services Allows you to configure the settings of the names for the scanned document files when they are saved or transferred E mail Refer...

Page 560: ... Audit Log Allows you to enable the Audit Log feature that logs the operation on the machine and retrieve the audit log Machine Digital Certificate Management Allows you to create a self signed certificate and import a certificate to the machine IPSec Refer to Configuration of Encryption using IPSec P 608 Certificate Management Displays the certificates registered on the machine Also allows you to...

Page 561: ...e Hard Disk P 552 Service Representative Restricted Operation Allows you to restrict the operation of service representatives Prevents the machine from being altered by someone impersonating our service representative System Administrator Settings Refer to System Administrator Settings P 543 Smart Card Settings Allows you to configure the smart card settings and backup the settings Item How to Sel...

Page 562: ...14 CentreWare Internet Services Settings 562 CentreWare Internet Services Settings 14 ...

Page 563: ...achine Note For information on how to print via Print Server refer to User Guide attached to Print Server connected to the machine z Print Overview 564 z Installation When Using USB Port 566 z Installation When Using TCP IP LPD Port 9100 568 z Installation When Using Internet Printing Protocol IPP 571 ...

Page 564: ... machine to a computer For more information on how to set up the machine using USB connection refer to Installation When Using USB Port P 566 Using the Machine as a Network Printer To set up the machine as a network printer the following protocols are available to connect the machine LPD Use LPD when direct communication between the machine and a computer via TCP IP is available For more informati...

Page 565: ...ems O Available Blank Not available The USB 2 0 Kit optional is required And a USB 2 0 port is required on a computer to connect Connection method Local connection Network connection Port USB2 0 LPD IPP Port9100 Protocol TCP IP TCP IP TCP IP OS Windows XP O O O O Windows Server 2003 O O O O Windows Server 2008 O O O O Windows Server 2012 O O O O Windows Server 2012 R2 O O O O Windows Vista O O O O...

Page 566: ...ministrator s user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed on the screen and select Enter When a passcode is required select Next and enter the system administrator s passcode and select Enter Note The default user ID is 11111 The default passcode is x admin 3 Select Tools on the Services Home screen 2 Enable the USB port on the machine 1 Select Connectivity Network Setup 2 Select Por...

Page 567: ... on the setting items click Help at the upper right corner of the CentreWare Internet Services screen to see help For information on how to start CentreWare Internet Services refer to Starting CentreWare Internet Services P 557 Important To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services users need to have the environment to connect to the internet The communication fee shall be borne by ...

Page 568: ...items that can be configured using CentreWare Internet Services refer to CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items P 569 1 Display the Tools screen 1 Press the Log In Out button 2 Enter the system administrator s user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed on the screen and select Enter When a passcode is required select Next and enter the system administrator s passcode and select ...

Page 569: ...ect Enabled and then select Save 7 Select Close Note Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings When a message displayed on the screen follow the message and reboot the machine 8 Print a configuration report to confirm that the LPD port is enabled and that TCP IP is set up correctly For information on how to print a configuration report refer to Print Reports P 622 9 Configure...

Page 570: ...Settings z IP Mode z Host Name z IPv4 IP Address Resolution Port Settings IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address z IPv6 Enable Manual Address IP Address Link Local Address Gateway Address z Domain Name z DNS Configuration IPv4 IPv6 z DHCP DDNS z WINS Server z Port Number z Connection Time Out z Maximum Number of Sessions Note The Maximum Number of Sessions can be configured when the LPD port is en...

Page 571: ...settings Note You can configure the settings using CentreWare Internet Services For the items that can be configured using CentreWare Internet Services refer to CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items P 572 1 Display the Tools screen 1 Press the Log In Out button 2 Enter the system administrator s user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed on the screen and select Enter When a pa...

Page 572: ...om the machine you need to install a print driver on your computer Note Download the print driver from our official web site For information on the supported operating systems refer to Supported Operating Systems P 565 CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items You can configure the following setting items using CentreWare Internet Services For details on the setting items click Help at the upper ...

Page 573: ...16 E mail Environment Settings This chapter describes the settings to use various services via e mail on the machine z E mail Overview 574 z Preparations 575 z Installation Procedures 577 ...

Page 574: ...Status notifications such as consumables The machine can notify the status information such as consumable status parts status and paper tray status that is set in E mail Notification for Machine Status of CentreWare Internet Services to a specified recipient By receiving the statuses of consumables periodically or when they need to be replaced soon you can properly determine when to replace the to...

Page 575: ...O O DNS server address Required when the addresses for a POP3 server and an SMTP server are set with a domain name format instead of their IP addresses You can also acquire this from DHCP U U U U U U SMTP server address The machine uses a SMTP server to send e mails The SMTP server can also be used for receiving e mails O O O U O O SMTP AUTH login name and password If an SMTP server requires authe...

Page 576: ...rmation on server settings contact your System Administrator Item Description E mail Store Send Link Print E mail E mail Notification Job Completion Notice via SMTP via POP3 Machine e mail address When using the E mail feature on the machine an e mail account of the machine must be registered on a mail server in advance O O O O O O Host name Set the host name and domain name of the machine along w...

Page 577: ...lect Tools on the Services Home screen 2 Enable ports to use for the E mail feature 1 Select Connectivity Network Setup 2 Select Port Settings 3 Select Send E mail and then select Change Settings 4 Select Port Status and then select Change Settings 5 Select Enabled and then select Save 6 Select Close 7 Select Enabled on the Receive E mail Port Status screen under Receive E mail as described above ...

Page 578: ...select Next and enter the system administrator s passcode and select Enter Note The default user ID is 11111 The default passcode is x admin 3 Select Tools on the Services Home screen 2 Set up the e mail address of the machine 1 Select Connectivity Network Setup 2 Select Machine s E mail Address Host Name and then configure items For information on how to set an e mail address refer to Machine s E...

Page 579: ...efer to Domain Filtering P 491 8 Set up the S MIME information 1 Select Connectivity Network Setup 2 Select Security Settings 3 Select S MIME Settings and then set the items For more information on how to configure S MIME refer to S MIME Settings P 487 9 Select Close repeatedly until the Tools screen is displayed 10 Select Close Note Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings ...

Page 580: ...16 E mail Environment Settings 580 E mail Environment Settings 16 ...

Page 581: ...z Scan Service Overview 582 z Configuration of Store to Folder 584 z Configuration of Scan to PC 586 z Configuration of Store to USB 589 z Configuration of Network Scanning Job Template Scanning 590 z Configuration of Scan to My Folder 592 z Configuration of Job Flow Sheets 597 z Configuration of Store Send Link 599 z Configuration of Store to WSD 601 ...

Page 582: ...an scan a document you want to retrieve as electronic data and store it on a computer connected to a network For information on the Scan to PC service refer to Configuration of Scan to PC P 586 Network Scanning Job Template Scanning A file defined with scanning conditions is called a job template You can apply a job template to a document scanned on the machine The scanned document is saved on the...

Page 583: ...cument into electronic form store it in the hard disk and send a URL that indicates the location of the document Note To use the Store Send Link feature you need to configure the authentication settings For information on the Store Send Link service refer to Configuration of Store Send Link P 599 Store to WSD You can remotely scan the document and store the image by operating on the computer Using...

Page 584: ...guring Machine Settings Using CentreWare Internet Services P 558 1 Display the Tools screen 1 Press the Log In Out button 2 Enter the system administrator s user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed on the screen and select Enter When a passcode is required select Next and enter the system administrator s passcode and select Enter Note The default user ID is 11111 The default passc...

Page 585: ... Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings When a message displayed on the screen follow the message and reboot the machine 6 Print a configuration report to confirm that the WebDAV port is enabled and that TCP IP is set up correctly For information on how to print a configuration report refer to Print Reports P 622 Step 2 Registering a Folder Register a folder to store scann...

Page 586: ...oft Internet Information Server z Mac OS X FTP service of Mac OS X 10 4 Mac OS X 10 5 Leopard 10 6 Snow Leopard 10 7 Lion OS X 10 8 Mountain Lion and OS X 10 9 Mavericks For information on how to configure the FTP service refer to the manual provided with the software For information on how to configure the settings on Mac OS X 10 7 Lion OS X 10 8 Mountain Lion or OS X 10 9 Mavericks consult the o...

Page 587: ...2 Enable the port Using SMB Enable the SMB port 1 Select Connectivity Network Setup 2 Select Port Settings 3 Select SMB Client and then select Change Settings 4 Select Port Status and then select Change Settings 5 Select Enabled and then select Save 6 Select Close repeatedly until the Tools screen is displayed Using FTP Enable the FTP port 1 Select Connectivity Network Setup 2 Select Port Settings...

Page 588: ...enabled and that TCP IP is set up correctly For information on how to print a configuration report refer to Print Reports P 622 Step 3 Configuration on the Computer Create a destination folder on your computer z Using FTP Create a destination folder on the server where you login and set write rights on the folder z Using SMB Create a shared folder on your computer and set the write rights on the s...

Page 589: ...g name Note USB memory devices that are encrypted with software cannot be used with the machine CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items You can enable disable the Store to USB service using CentreWare Internet Services When you disable the service the Store to USB button is not displayed on the Services Home screen and you cannot use the service The Store to USB service is set to enabled by fac...

Page 590: ...ws 7 Microsoft Windows 8 Microsoft Windows 8 1 Step 2 Enabling Ports and Setting up TCP IP To use Network Scanning service enable the port and set the IP address The following describes the configuration procedures on the machine Note You can configure the settings using CentreWare Internet Services For information on how to use CentreWare Internet Services refer to Configuring Machine Settings Us...

Page 591: ...iguration report to confirm that the ports are enabled and that TCP IP is set up correctly For information on how to print a configuration report refer to Print Reports P 622 Step 3 Configuring the SNMP Port Configure the transport protocol for the SNMP port using CentreWare Internet Services 1 Start CentreWare Internet Services For information on how to start CentreWare Internet Services refer to...

Page 592: ...tem To use the Scan to My Folder service a remote authentication system is required For more information about a remote authentication system refer to Authentication System P 481 Destination Computer The following operation system must be installed on a destination computer For Mac OS X a sharing user account is required on the Mac OS X z Microsoft Windows Server 2003 z Microsoft Windows Server 20...

Page 593: ...elect Save 6 Select Close repeatedly until the Tools screen is displayed 3 Set the IP address and the other addresses Skip this step if an IP address is already set If DHCP or BOOTP is available in your environment configure the method for obtaining the address If an IP address cannot be obtained automatically or manual configuration is preferred confirm the settings of an IP address a subnet mask...

Page 594: ...Select Authentication System and then select Change Settings 6 Select the remote authentication system to use and then select Save 7 Select Close Note If an authentication setting is not configured on a remote authentication server selected configure settings under Remote Authentication Directory Service For LDAP Server Directory Service Settings a configuration is required regardless of a remote ...

Page 595: ...identical with the screen displayed by selecting Properties Connectivity Protocols LDAP LDAP User Mappings Transferring files to a directory specified by CentreWare Internet Services without using LDAP directory service information 1 Select the No LDAP Query check box for Determine Home Directory 2 Enter a directory name of the storage location in Network Home Path Specify a folder name using UNC ...

Page 596: ... the System check box for Login Credentials to Access the Destination 2 Configure the authentication information such as Login Name and Passcode Enter a login name in Login Name with up to 97 single byte characters Enter a passcode in Passcode with up to 32 single byte characters Re enter the passcode in Retype Passcode for confirmation 6 Click Apply Step 5 Configuration on the Computer Create a d...

Page 597: ... passcode and select Enter Note The default user ID is 11111 The default passcode is x admin 3 Select Tools on the Services Home screen 2 Enable the SOAP port 1 Select Connectivity Network Setup 2 Select Port Settings 3 Select SOAP and then select Change Settings 4 Select Port Status and then select Change Settings 5 Select Enabled and then select Save 6 Select Close repeatedly until the Port Sett...

Page 598: ...e transport protocol for the SNMP port using CentreWare Internet Services 1 Start CentreWare Internet Services For information on how to start CentreWare Internet Services refer to Starting CentreWare Internet Services P 557 2 Configure the transport protocol for the SNMP port 1 Click the Properties tab 2 Click Connectivity 3 Click Port Settings 4 Select the UDP check box under SNMP 5 Click Apply ...

Page 599: ...rvices Setting Items 599 Step 1 Configuring E mail Configure the e mail settings on the machine For information on how to configure e mail settings refer to E mail Environment Settings P 573 Step 2 Enabling Authentication Configure the authentication settings on the machine For information on how to configure e mail settings refer to Configuration for Authentication P 650 Step 3 Other Settings Con...

Page 600: ...t the upper right corner of the CentreWare Internet Services screen to see help Important To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services users need to have the environment to connect to the internet The communication fee shall be borne by you For information on how to start CentreWare Internet Services refer to Starting CentreWare Internet Services P 557 ...

Page 601: ...re the settings using CentreWare Internet Services For information on how to use CentreWare Internet Services refer to Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare Internet Services P 558 WSD stands for Web Services on Devices 1 Display the Tools screen 1 Press the Log In Out button 2 Enter the system administrator s user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed on the screen and sele...

Page 602: ...Hardware and Sound Scanners and Cameras on Windows 7 select Control Panel Devices and Printers on Windows 8 and Windows 8 1 Select Control Panel Hardware and Sound Device and Printers and confirm the machine name on the screen It is convenient to configure the settings such as the color format file type and resolution in Scan Profiles and save them in advance For more information refer to Windows ...

Page 603: ...nature feature on the machine Note XPS stands for XML Paper Specification z Encryption and Digital Signature Overview 604 z Configuration of HTTP Communications Encryption 606 z Configuration of Encryption using IPSec 608 z Configuration of E mail Encryption Digital Signature 611 z Configuration of PDF DocuWorks XPS Signature 615 ...

Page 604: ... Available when IKE Authentication Method is set to Authenticate by Digital Signature 2 XPS stands for XML Paper Specification Encryption Features for Communication The data sent between the machine and computers on a network can be encrypted Encrypting HTTP Communications from a Client to the Machine SSL TLS Server The SOAP Internet Services HTTP IPP and WebDAV ports use the HTTP server of the ma...

Page 605: ...s refer to IPSec Settings P 489 To verify the certificate of the remote device you must register a root certificate created by a CA of the remote device on the machine Note To use certificates that have already been created import them with CentreWare Internet Services E mail Encryption Digital Signature S MIME is used for E mail Encryption Digital Signature To use S MIME on the machine S MIME cer...

Page 606: ... needed The following describes the procedures to set up a certificate by CentreWare Internet Services Setting up a Certificate using CentreWare Internet Services To set up a certificate using CentreWare Internet Services you can have the machine create a self signed certificate for SSL server or can import any registered certificate issued by another CA to the machine For information on how to im...

Page 607: ...TP SSL TLS Communication 4 Set up HTTP SSL TLS Communication Port Number Note Do not use the numbers of any other ports 5 Click Apply 6 When the right frame of the web browser changes to the machine reboot display click Reboot Machine The machine reboots and the settings are enabled Step2 Configuration on the Computer To encrypt communications between a web browser and the machine enter an address...

Page 608: ...ng certificates by CentreWare Internet Services Enable HTTPS and then import a certificate issued by another CA to the machine Note If a certificate to be imported as an IPSec certificate contains V3 extension KeyUsage digitalSignature bit must be asserted Configuration on the Computer Configure the following settings to encrypt communications between a computer and the machine z Create an IP secu...

Page 609: ...nt 3 Select Local Device for Category and IPSec for Certificate Purpose and then click the Display the list button 4 Select the check box next to the certificate to set 5 Click the Certificate Details button 6 Click the Use this certificate button 7 Click Reboot Machine The machine reboots and the settings are enabled Step2 Configuration on the Machine Configuration of IPSec The following describe...

Page 610: ...tings 18 Step3 Configuration on the Computer The following describes the configuration procedures on the computer Configure the following settings on the computer z Create an IP security policy z Assign the IP security policy For details on the settings refer to the help of the computer ...

Page 611: ...ed on the machine by factory default Configure the following settings to set up a certificate on the machine z Configuring certificates by CentreWare Internet Services Set up HTTPS communications encryption settings and then configure a certificate on the machine Configuration on Sender and Recipient To transmit e mails encrypted by S MIME and with digital signatures attached register the required...

Page 612: ...for Certificate Purpose and then click the Display the list button 4 Select the check box next to the certificate to set 5 Click the Certificate Details button 6 Click the Use this certificate button 7 Click Reboot Machine The machine reboots and the settings are enabled 8 Refresh the web browser 4 Enable S MIME Communication 1 Click Security to display the items in the folder 2 Click SSL TLS Sett...

Page 613: ...l signature to a computer from the machine and register it to the certificate store of an e mail application in the computer To send an e mail with S MIME digital signature select Always add signature or Select during send for Digital Signature Outgoing E mail under Tools System Settings Connectivity Network Setup Security Settings S MIME Settings in advance z Export the certificate of the machine...

Page 614: ... it to the certificate store of an e mail application in the computer ForinformationonhowtoimportandexportacertificateusingCentreWareInternetServices referto Importing exporting a certificate using CentreWare Internet Services P 614 or the help of CentreWare Internet Services Important To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services users need to have the environment to connect to the ...

Page 615: ...hine to a computer You must register a personal certificate as the destination on the machine and then register the certificate on the Address Book When you register a personal certificate on the machine include the root certificate in the personal certificate For information on how to import a certificate click Help at the upper right corner of the CentreWare Internet Services screen to see help ...

Page 616: ...lick the Display the list button 4 Select the check box next to the certificate to set 5 Click the Certificate Details button 6 Click the Use this certificate button 7 Click Reboot Machine The machine reboots and the settings are enabled 4 Configure the settings for PDF Signature DocuWorks Signature XPS Signature Note XPS stands for XML Paper Specification 1 Refresh the web browser 2 Click Securit...

Page 617: ...rtificate on the Address Book When you register a personal certificate on the machine include the root certificate in the personal certificate For information on how to register import a certificate click Help at the upper right corner of the CentreWare Internet Services screen to see help Important To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services users need to have the environment to c...

Page 618: ...18 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings 618 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings 18 ...

Page 619: ...19 Machine Status This chapter describes the features for checking the machine status z Overview of Machine Status 620 z Machine Information 621 z Faults 632 z Supplies 633 z Billing Information 634 ...

Page 620: ...ing status You can also change or set print modes and check the number of pages printed per meter or per user You also can print various reports lists to check the job history settings and registered information For more information refer to Machine Information P 621 Faults You can check the information on errors that occurred on the machine For more information refer to Faults P 632 Supplies You ...

Page 621: ...e status General Information On the General Information screen you can check the serial number of the machine machine configuration and software version Website Tells you whom to contact when making inquiries about maintenance and operation Machine Serial Number Indicates the serial number of the machine Current System Software Indicates the current system software IP Address Indicates the IP addr...

Page 622: ...reen P 88 Software Version Screen You can check the software version 1 Select Software Version 2 Check the software versions Paper Tray Status You can check the paper trays set on the machine On the screen you can check the following items z Status z Full Amount of paper remaining z Paper Size z Paper Type 1 Select Paper Tray Status 2 Check the status of the paper trays Print Reports The following...

Page 623: ... prints the multiple related jobs such as job flow jobs on one line You can also set up the machine to automatically print a Job History Report every 50 jobs For information on the auto print of a job history report refer to Reports P 436 When you set the machine to print a job history report automatically the machine prints the results of all jobs Error History Report You can print information on...

Page 624: ...figured in the TIFF and JPEG printer mode TIFF JPEG Logical Printers List Prints the list of logical printers created in the TIFF and JPEG printer mode You can configure the setting for TIFF and JPEG logical printers using CentreWare Internet Services For more information on the settings refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services Important To display the online help for CentreWare Internet ...

Page 625: ...can Configuration Report and Domain Filter List Select a list to print and then press the Start button z Configuration Report You can check the hardware configuration network information and print and copy settings of the machine Note The contents of Configuration Report are identical whether it is printed from Copy Reports Printer Reports or Scan Reports z Scan Configuration You can check the set...

Page 626: ...older numbers to print 3 Press the Start button Job Counter Report Prints the counter report for each job You can check the breakdown of the number of actual use of the machine by feature such as the number of pages printed and the number of times used and cumulative time when the machine is used such as runtime standby time Low Power mode Sleep mode and power off time by minutes on the Job Counte...

Page 627: ...u can print the auditron report per user for the services of which the Auditron mode is set to Enable Accounting For information on enabling the Auditron feature for each service refer to Accounting P 536 1 Select Auditron Reports Note To display the Auditron Reports screen select the Machine Status button and then select Machine Information Print Reports Auditron Reports 2 Select an auditron repo...

Page 628: ...scanned data by e mail fails You can check a thumbnail of the scanned data and its transmission result You can set not to print out the Transmission Report Undelivered automatically For information on setting whether to print the report for e mails automatically referto Scan File Transfer Report P 436 Transmission Report The report is automatically printed when a transmission of scanned data to a ...

Page 629: ...d 1 Press the Machine Status button 2 Select Print Mode 3 Select Off line or On line Off line The machine does not accept data from a computer Any data being sent is cancelled and not printed On line The printer accepts data from a computer 4 Select a printer language to set a print mode 5 Set each item Note The items displayed vary depending on the printer language Retrieve Programming You can re...

Page 630: ... P 935 PDF Direct Print Settings P 948 DocuWorks Direct Print P 950 PCL Emulation P 952 and HP GL 2 Emulation Settings P 961 1 Select Programming 2 Enter the item number of the feature to set in Item Number with the numeric keypad 3 Select Confirm The current setting value appears 4 Select Change Value 5 Enter New Value with the numeric keypad 6 Select Save Store Delete Programming For ESC P K and...

Page 631: ...n start the machine using the settings stored in memory as default settings 1 Select Default Programming 2 Select Factory Defaults or Custom Settings Factory Defaults You can use the factory default settings Custom Settings Displays the numbers stored in memory 3 When you select Custom Settings select a memory number to use 4 Select Save Password For PDF Direct Print if a password is set for files...

Page 632: ...e and error category The following describes how to print the error history report 1 Press the Machine Status button 2 Select the Faults tab 3 Select Error History Report 4 Press the Start button Note You can also access Error History Report under Machine Information Print Reports Job Status If Print Reports Button under Reports is set to Disabled the Error History Report button does not appear on...

Page 633: ...tatus of the toners Note Pressing a supply name displays a screen about the status of the supply 3 Select Other Consumables from the drop down menu and confirm the status of the consumables Important If you replace a toner cartridge with a partially used toner cartridge such as a toner cartridge removed from another Versant 80 Press the status displayed may differ from the actual remaining amount ...

Page 634: ...tion 2 On the screen check each meter Note Previous Meter Reading can be displayed when using EP system Serial Number Displays the serial number of the machine Color Impressions Displays the total number of pages copied and printed in full color Black Impressions Displays the total number of pages copied and printed in black and white Color Large Impressions Displays the total number of pages prin...

Page 635: ... mode refer to Accounting P 536 1 Press the Log In Out button To check the billing meter of a currently authenticated user ID 1 Enter the user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed on the screen and select Enter When a password is required select Next and enter the user s passcode and select Enter 2 Press the Machine Status button To check the system administrator meter 1 Enter the ...

Page 636: ...r to check Note The meters are displayed only for the features set to Enable Accounting in the Auditron mode Meter Copy Jobs Displays the number of pages copied Meter Scan Jobs Displays the number of pages scanned Meter Print Jobs Displays the number of pages printed Note Meter Print Jobs is not displayed for the system administrator ...

Page 637: ...s chapter describes the settings to restrict the availability of services and to manage account usage on the machine z Overview of Authentication and Accounting Feature 638 z Services Controlled by Authentication 644 z Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Folders 647 z Configuration for Authentication 650 z Configuration for IC Card Reader Sold Separately 655 z Configuration for Account Administ...

Page 638: ...vices enter the user ID and passcode on the screen A user ID of a login user can be associated with some sub users in accordance with the intended use Up to 10 sub user IDs can be associated with a user ID Note An optional component is required to use the sub user feature For more information contact our Customer Support Center Unregistered User An unregistered user is a user not registered on the...

Page 639: ...set to Only From Address Book For details on the Restrict Recipient Selection Method setting refer to Restrict Recipient Selection Method P 456 Restrict User to Edit Address Book Allows you to set whether or not to permit the group members to edit the Address Book in the machine when editing the Address Book is prohibited For details on the Restrict User to Edit Address Book setting refer to Restr...

Page 640: ...on configured on the client s print driver with the information registered on the machine In this case depending on the remote authentication system the domain name needs to be set Set the domain name from the print driver For information on print driver settings refer to the help of the driver Login to Remote Accounts Authentication is performed for a remote server User information is not registe...

Page 641: ...tion Agent is set for Authentication System ApeosWare Authentication Management automatically becomes an accounting authentication server Note Some Accounting Types may be grayed out and not selectable depending on the Login Type selected For more information refer to Authentication and Accounting Relationship P 642 Local Accounting Local Accounting performs account administration on the machine I...

Page 642: ...reWare Internet Services users need to have the environment to connect to the internet The communication fee shall be borne by you When setting the user information or account information for another machine we recommend that you use the Cloning feature of CentreWare Internet Services Authentication and Accounting Relationship You can individually select Login and Accounting Types and can combine ...

Page 643: ...e scan jobs and the information that can be managed for each scan job Services Jobs Target User Managed Items Normal Print Printing via the Print Server Login user Pages sheets Machine s print driver Login user Other than machine s print driver Unregistered user Secure Print Print Files Login User Sample Set Delayed Print Charge Print Private Charge Print Print E mail Unregistered user Services Jo...

Page 644: ...an be set foreach user referto ServiceAccess P 537 and forinformation onthe restrictions that can be set for the machine as a whole refer to Service Access P 545 Combination of Authentication and Account Administration types The following shows the services that can be restricted in use and accounted according to the combination of the authentication and accounting administration types For authent...

Page 645: ...are Log Management sold separately to perform account administration per user When users are registered in multiple domains each user ID must be unique Before a user sends a job from a computer print the user needs to log in from the computer to the remote server to have the server confirm the user ID When Login Type is Login to Local Accounts and Accounting Type is Xerox Standard Accounting Servi...

Page 646: ...n select features available for each user For more information refer to the online help of CentreWare Internet Services Important To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services users need to have the environment to connect to the internet The communication fee shall be borne by you ...

Page 647: ...een can only be used for the folder on which the job flow sheet is created The job flow sheet cannot be used for any other folders The job flow sheets created on the network cannot be edited or copied on the machine Note When using Device Setup Tool the job flow sheets for the documents stored in the folders and the scan documents can be created on the network Device Setup Tool is downloaded from ...

Page 648: ...entication feature is used and is not used are different in use Important When you switch the Login to Local Accounts feature from enable to disable or vice versa all the job flow sheets used till then become unavailable besides for the system administrator In this case delete all the job flow sheets and create new ones When you change Login type to Login to Remote Accounts or to another login typ...

Page 649: ...he creator of a folder and the user who can manage the folder Only the system administrator can operate Note Registering and outputting files using Network Scanner Utility 3 is not supported as the authenticated operation Creator of Folder Manageable User Available Operations Login User Creator System Administrator Display Delete Change Settings Display File Delete File Register File Output File D...

Page 650: ...cess control and then create a user Login to Remote Accounts Specify the Login Type access control and remote authentication server Change the default authorization group settings and add an authorization group as necessary Enabling Authentication This section describes the procedures for Login to Local Accounts and Login to Remote Accounts respectively When Login to Local Accounts is Selected Per...

Page 651: ...displayed 21 Select Close Note Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings When a message displayed on the screen follow the message and reboot the machine The machine enters the Login mode and Login is displayed at the lower left of the Services Home screen When Locked Show Icon is selected for a service under Service Access is displayed on the button of the applicable service...

Page 652: ... and SMB Server Settings P 486 18 Select Close repeatedly until the Tools screen is displayed 19 Select Close Note Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings When a message displayed on the screen follow the message and reboot the machine The machine enters the Login mode and Login is displayed at the lower left of the Services Home screen When Locked Show Icon is selected for...

Page 653: ...horization Groups 7 Select the group displayed as Default Group Default and then select Create Delete 8 Set each item For more information on the change of the authorization group refer to Create Authorization Groups P 546 9 Select Close repeatedly until the Tools screen is displayed 10 Select Close Creating an Authorization Group Perform the following procedures to add authorization groups if nec...

Page 654: ...54 Authentication and Accounting Features 20 9 Set the other items For more information on the authorization group settings refer to Create Authorization Groups P 546 10 Select Close repeatedly until the Tools screen is displayed 11 Select Close ...

Page 655: ... are supported by the machine Each IC Card Reader supports following smart card types When using IC Card Reader z MIFARE Type A Fuji Xerox IC Card Type A Other MIFARE compatible smart cards z eLWISE ELWISE Type B eLWISE ELWISE z FeliCa Fuji Xerox IC Card IC Card compatible with SSFC version 1 0 format Other FeliCa compatible smart cards The embedded IC Card Reader of the machine may not support so...

Page 656: ...mart Card Information The system administrator can register smart cards using CentreWare Internet Services Note The smart card information can be set from CentreWare Internet Services For more information refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services The information used for authentication can also be set from CentreWare Internet Services For more information refer to the help of CentreWare In...

Page 657: ...tem administrator s passcode and select Enter Note The default user ID is 11111 The default passcode is x admin 3 Select Tools on the Services Home screen 4 Select Accounting 5 Select Accounting Type 6 Select an accounting type and then select Save Note You can select the accounting type from Local Accounting Network Accounting and Xerox Standard Accounting For information on the accounting types ...

Page 658: ...ings for each service and then select Save For more information on the account limit refer to Service Access P 537 10 If necessary select a user role and an authorization group for the user under User Role and then select Save Note User Role is displayed only when Login Type is set to Login to Local Accounts For more information on the user role refer to User Role P 538 11 Select Close repeatedly ...

Page 659: ...r more information contact our Customer Support Center Log In Log Out from the Operator Panel User Authentication 1 Press the Log In Out button or the login information field on the touch screen 2 Enter the user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed on the screen and select Enter When a passcode is required select Next and enter the passcode and select Enter Important Finish user au...

Page 660: ...e Services Home screen 2 Select User Details Setup 3 Select Change Passcode 4 Enter the current passcode and then select Next 5 Select New Passcode and enter a new passcode and then select Save 6 Select Retype Passcode and re enter the new passcode and then select Save 7 Select Close Setting or Changing Passcode by System Administrator The system administrator can set or change passcodes using Cen...

Page 661: ...ort List 685 z Deleting a Private Charge Print Job with an Invalid User ID 686 z Setting Restore Tool 687 z Auto Alignment Adjustment Settings 688 z Manual Alignment Adjustment 695 z Density Uniformity Adjustment Semi Auto Process Using Scanner 704 z Density Uniformity Adjustment Manual Process 706 z Fold Position Adjustment 709 z Adjust Paper Curl 717 z Adjust Image Transfer Using Sample Printout...

Page 662: ...arts in stock z When calling our Customer Support Center to order consumables periodic replacement parts have the product codes ready z The use of consumables periodic replacement parts not recommended by Fuji Xerox could impair machine quality and performance Use only consumables periodic replacement parts recommended by Fuji Xerox Checking the status of consumables You can check the status of co...

Page 663: ...er use a vacuum cleaner for spilled toner and residual toner in this product toner cartridge or toner bottle It may catch fire by electric sparks inside a vacuum cleaner and cause explosion Use a broom or a wet cloth to wipe off the spills If you spill a large volume of toner contact your local Fuji Xerox representative z Never throw a toner cartridge into an open flame Remaining toner in the cart...

Page 664: ...After the message The Toner Cartridge needs to be replaced soon appears on the touch screen copy or print density may be reduced slightly If a partially used toner cartridge is used a message appears and the number of pages that you can copy or print displayed on the screen may differ considerably Note Monochrome copying and printing is available even when color toners are run out 1 Open the machi...

Page 665: ...floor We recommend laying paper on the floor beforehand Proper disposal of used waste toner container is required The used waste toner container must be returned to our Customer Support Center The use of waste toner containers not recommended by Fuji Xerox may impair quality and performance Use only waste toner containers recommended by Fuji Xerox for the machine Replace the waste toner container ...

Page 666: ... Important Proper disposal of used waste toner container is required The used waste toner container must be returned to our Customer Support Center Be sure to put the used waste toner container in the dedicated plastic bag supplied with the new waste toner container 6 Hold the center part on the top of a new container and insert it until it stops 7 Close the waste toner container cover 8 Close the...

Page 667: ...Fuji Xerox Note To order a staple cartridge contact our Customer Support Center If the staple cartridge was not replaced properly the message remains on the touch screen Follow the procedure and replace the staple cartridge again When the Finisher C3 or the Finisher C3 with Booklet Maker is installed The following describes how to replace a staple cartridge for the Finisher C3 with Booklet Maker a...

Page 668: ... cartridge into its original position until it clicks into place 7 Close the finisher front door Note If the front door is not closed completely a message appears and the machine will remain paused When the Finisher D4 the Finisher D4 with Booklet or the Finisher D5 is installed The following describes how to replace a staple cartridge for the Finisher D4 with Booklet as an example The procedure i...

Page 669: ...staple cartridge to remove it from the unit in the direction of the arrow as shown in the figure 5 Push a new staple cartridge into the unit 6 Push the removed unit back to the original position 7 Close the finisher right door Note A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the finisher right door is even slightly open ...

Page 670: ...f staple cartridges not recommended by Fuji Xerox may impair quality and performance Use only staple cartridges recommended by Fuji Xerox for the machine Note To order a staple cartridge contact our Customer Support Center When the booklet staple cartridge is not replaced properly the message remains on the touch screen Follow the procedure and replace the booklet staple cartridge again When the F...

Page 671: ...ase 1 and pull out the empty staple case from the staple cartridge Important The staple case cannot be removed when the staples are remained in the staple case Forcibly removing the staple case may cause machine malfunction 6 Insert the new staple case 1 and push the rear side of the new staple case into the staple cartridge 7 Close the cover 8 Return the booklet staple cartridge to its original p...

Page 672: ...ose the finisher front door Note If the front door is not closed completely a message appears and the machine will remain paused When the Finisher D4 with Booklet is installed 1 Make sure that the machine has stopped and open the finisher right door 2 While pushing the handle R2 R3 to the right 1 pull the unit out of the machine 2 3 With holding the tabs on the right and left side of the cartridge...

Page 673: ...Waste Container When the Finisher D4 optional the Finisher D4 with Booklet optional or the Finisher D5 optional is installed and the staple waste container becomes full a message appears on the touch screen Replace the staple waste container according to the message The following describes how to replace a staple waste container for the Finisher D4 with Booklet as an example The procedure is the s...

Page 674: ...d remove the staple waste container from the machine 4 Put the used staple waste container into a supplied plastic bag Important The used staple waste container needs a proper disposal Do not disassemble the container and return it to our Customer Support Center 5 Hold the new staple waste container by R5 and push it into the machine Important To prevent injury do not put your fingers on top of th...

Page 675: ...l before the message appears again and this can cause machine breakdown Important When emptying the hole punch waste container make sure that the machine is switched on If not switched on the machine will not recognize that the hole punch waste container has been emptied When the machine is in Power Saver mode exit Power Saver mode by pressing the Power Saver button and the Machine Status button o...

Page 676: ... a message appears on the touch screen Discard the scraps according to the message If you take the trimmer waste container out of the machine make sure to empty it completely If it is reinstalled with some scraps remaining it may become full before the message appears again and this can cause machine breakdown Important When emptying the trimmer waste container make sure that the machine is switch...

Page 677: ... the machine has stopped and pull out the trimmer waste container slowly 2 Hold the trimmer waste container by its belt and pull out the container with both hands 3 Discard all the scraps 4 Insert the empty trimmer waste container all the way into the machine ...

Page 678: ...with a soft cloth Cleaning the Touch Screen 1 Wipe only the LCD area with a soft cloth moistened with neutral detergent or alcohol Important When you moisten the cloth with neutral detergent or alcohol do not allow the excess liquid to drip down from the cloth If the cloth is moistened with the excess liquid wring the cloth gently before wiping the LCD area Do not use any volatile liquids on the m...

Page 679: ...mportant Do not use cleaning agents other than water or neutral detergent Note If dirt does not come off easily try gently wiping with a soft cloth moistened with a small amount of neutral detergent Cleaning the Narrow Glass Strip and Document Presser If the narrow glass strip and document presser of the document feeder are dirty streaks or smears may appear on copies and the machine may not prope...

Page 680: ...gent 6 Close the chute part 7 Lower the document feeder 8 Press the power switch to switch on the power 9 Lift and lower the document feeder again Cleaning the Document Feeder Rollers If the document feeder roller is dirty streaks or smears may appear on copies and document jams may occur To ensure clean copies at all times clean the document feeder roller about once a month Important Do not use b...

Page 681: ... prevent water drops from falling into the machine If water gets into the machine it may cause machine malfunction Drops of water on internal components may cause a malfunction Note If dirt does not come off easily gently wipe with a soft cloth moistened with a small amount of neutral detergent 3 Close the document feeder top cover until it clicks into place 4 Close the document feeder left cover ...

Page 682: ... executing auto calibration for all four screen types When the adjustment for one screen type is complete specify the next screen type and repeat the procedure If color is not calibrated despite the periodic execution of auto calibration contact our Customer Support Center Confirm the settings of the following items under Tools System Settings Copy Service Settings Copy Defaults in the System Admi...

Page 683: ... Home screen is not displayed on the touch screen press the Services Home button 4 Select System Settings Common Service Settings Image Quality Adjustment 5 Select Calibration 2 Set Screen Type Paper Supply and Target Note The following describes calibration procedures using Copy Job 2 as an example For Paper Supply select the paper tray in which A4 A3 8 5 x 11 or 11 x 17 white paper is loaded For...

Page 684: ...n Chart to cover the Chart and close the document cover 6 Select Start The message Calibration in progress Copy Job 2 appears and the machine automatically calibrates the colors It takes about 30 seconds to complete calibration A screen showing the result appears 7 Select Confirm 8 To continue calibration for other screen types repeat steps 2 to 7 9 Select Close repeatedly until the Services Home ...

Page 685: ...the Machine Status button 2 Select Print Reports Note If Print Reports Button under Reports is set to Disabled the Print Reports button appears only when the Tools button is displayed on the Services Home screen For more information on Reports refer to Reports P 436 3 Select the service that you want a report or list for 4 Select a report or list to print and then press the Start button Note The r...

Page 686: ...red with the Private Charge Print feature For more information on how to set the period of time save jobs refer to Stored File Settings P 513 1 Press the Log In Out button 2 Enter the system administrator s user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed on the screen and select Enter When a passcode is required select Next and enter the system administrator s passcode and select Enter N...

Page 687: ...mation on Setting Restore Tool contact our Customer Support Center Note You can back up the setting data of the machine when the hard disk and the Ethernet interface are installed on the machine The following data can be backed up on the computer z Address Book z Folder except for document files z User account list z Job Flow z Stored Programming z Job log z Error log z Auditron log z Other inform...

Page 688: ...mage with high precision because using a background sheet and scanning a calibration chart divided by four On the other hand scanning error may occur when using the document feeder because of its structure or the machine condition although the calibration chart is scanned automatically Scanning error could be improved by performing Document Feeder Scan Precision Adjustment Background sheets for th...

Page 689: ...ectively assign the alignment adjustment settings to the multiple paper trays print a calibration chart next print a calibration chart selecting another paper tray Scanning all calibration charts allows you to collectively save each adjustment settings of all the paper trays The printed calibration chart contains encoded information as to from which tray the chart was printed and what number of sh...

Page 690: ... using the document feeder and to assign the adjustment settings to tray 1 Select Scan Chart with Document Glass on the Auto Alignment Adjustment screen 2 Place a background sheet on the calibration chart and then close the document cover and select Scan Note For the background sheet use the file SIQA_sheet1_11x17 pdf or SIQA_sheet1_A3 pdf that is stored in the Alignment Background Sheet folder on...

Page 691: ...ntil a calibration chart is scanned at the correct positions The data which is scanned at the top and bottom portions of each of the front and back sides of a calibration chart four locations in total is used as the 1 time measurement data When scanning multiple calibration charts you can select Start to continuously carry out scanning 4 Select Start Auto Alignment Adjustment starts 5 After finish...

Page 692: ...heets Note You are recommended to average the variations that you print three and more sheets 5 Select Start The current sample printout is printed If the position of the sample printout is correct a line is printed at a position 15 mm from the edge of the paper If the position of the line on the sample printout is misaligned adjust it Note A dark black patch is printed on the image of side 1 and ...

Page 693: ... printout with Sample Printout and check the adjustment results 10 Adjust the alignment again if necessary 11 Select Save until the tray setting screen is displayed 12 Select a tray to assign the alignment adjustment settings and select Save Note If you select Save during Not set tray is selected an error message is displayed on the control panel In this case set the alignment adjustment type sele...

Page 694: ...ibration chart so that the top line of a calibration chart overlaps the bottom line of a background sheet Horizontal position Adjust the position of of a background sheet and the position of of a calibration chart as shown below 4 Reposition calibration chart and background sheet to scan the second to fourth locations After scanning has been completed at the correct position in each of the front b...

Page 695: ...ted authentication before printing or scanning a calibration chart Manual Alignment Adjustment You can adjust the position of output images on the machine as follows Skew Adjustment Adjust a skewed image Perpendicularity Rhombic Distortion Adjustment Adjust the distortion of an image Scale Adjustment Adjust the size scale of the output image in the paper feed direction X direction and in the verti...

Page 696: ...mode refer to System Settings Procedure P 404 3 Select Tools on the Services Home screen 4 Select System Settings Common Service Settings Maintenance 5 Select Alignment Adjustment Note Select to return to the previous screen or to move to the next screen 6 Select Manual Alignment Adjustment 7 Select the alignment adjustment type to set or adjust and then select Change Settings 8 Select Name and th...

Page 697: ...to show the paper feed direction 13 Select Confirm 14 Select Close 15 Check the sample printout and adjust the position if it is misaligned Important When adjusting multiple types of misalignments adjust them in the following order Perpendicularity Adjustment Skew Adjustment Scale Adjustment Print Position Adjustment For more information on each type of adjustment refer to the following sections F...

Page 698: ...mage faces the paper feed direction set positive number to adjust the perpendicularity of the image distorted like a parallelogram whose right side is located on the upper position and conversely set negative number to adjust the image whose left side is located on the upper position 1 Check the sample printout measuring the amount of squareness misalignment Use the following equation to obtain th...

Page 699: ...tween the sides 1 and 2 Thus if adjustable amount to the desired direction is not enough in one side adjust the other side Entering a positive or negative value adjusts the squareness as shown below 4 Select Save Skew Adjustment Adjust image skewing tilt extent in 0 1 mm increments for each of sides 1 and 2 Set positive number to rotate the image in a clockwise direction and conversely set negativ...

Page 700: ...ep 1 added as the current setting value of Side 1 and Side 2 Note The maximum and minimum values that can be entered and displayed above the entry frame depend on the setting of the machine inside If the tilt extent is not adjusted even after the maximum or minimum value is entered in one side adjust the other side Entering a positive or negative value adjusts the tilt extent as shown below 4 Sele...

Page 701: ...alignment amount image actual measurement length in the Y direction image reference length in the Y direction Y direction scale correction amount 1 scale misalignment amount in the Y direction divided by image reference length in the Y direction 100 Note The reference lengths for a sample printout of A3 or A4 size printed with Sample Printout are as follows 2 Select X Magnification Width or Y Magn...

Page 702: ... in the vertical direction in relation to the paper feed direction with Y Print Position 1 Check the sample printout measuring the amount of print position misalignment z X Print Position Specify a positive value to move the position of the image in the opposite direction of the paper feed direction and a negative value to move the position of the image in the paper feed direction z Y Print Positi...

Page 703: ...ent setting values of Side 1 and Side 2 of Y Print Position Note X Print Position Specify a positive value to move the position of the image in the opposite direction of the paper feed direction and a negative value to move the position of the image in the paper feed direction Y Print Position Specify a negative value to move the image toward the front of the machine or a positive value to move th...

Page 704: ...ration chart Density Uniformity Adjustment This section describes manual adjustment of the density uniformity 1 Load paper in a tray Note For the paper size select 210mm width x 210mm length or larger 2 Press the Log In Out button and then enter the System Administration mode For how to enter the System Administration mode refer to System Settings Procedure P 404 3 Select Tools on the Services Hom...

Page 705: ...rt on the CMYK measurement chart close the document cover and select Start After scanning has been completed remove the chart and blank sheets 12 Place the RGB calibration chart with the print side facing down and the edge of a black mark aligning to the upper side of the document glass 13 Place five or more blank sheets with the same size as for the chart on the RGB measurement chart and select S...

Page 706: ...on mode For how to enter the System Administration mode refer to System Settings Procedure P 404 3 Select Tools on the Services Home screen 4 Select System Settings Common Service Settings Maintenance 5 Select Density Uniformity Adjustment Note Select to return to the previous screen or to move to the next screen 6 Select Manual Process 7 Select the tray in which you loaded paper in step 1 and the...

Page 707: ...he sample output select the difference level of density from 1 to 9 Level shows there is no adjustment amount between the areas of the sample output Greater level shows greater difference z Inboard Outboard According to the sample output adjust the density pattern Select the adjustment amount from 17 to 17 Greater amount shows greater difference Input value Input value Note When the density patter...

Page 708: ...OUT IN OUT Lighter Density adjustment amount IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT Lighter IN OUT Darker IN OUT Density adjustment amount Density adjustment amount Lighter Darker Density adjustment amount Darker Density adjustment amount Darker Density adjustment amount Density adjustment amount Lighter Darker Density adjustment amount Density adjustment amount Density adjustment amount IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT ...

Page 709: ...s Procedure P 404 3 Select Tools on the Services Home screen 4 Select System Settings Common Service Settings Maintenance 5 Select Finisher Adjustment Note Select to return to the previous screen or to move to the next screen 6 Select Adjust Fold Position 7 Select a type and select Change Settings 8 Select Name and select Change Settings 9 Enter the type name and select Save Note We recommend you ...

Page 710: ...out 3 Select the tray in which you loaded paper and press the Start button A sample printout is printed 4 Select Close 5 Check the sample printout measuring the misaligned amount 6 Select Long at Left or Long at Right and enter the value you measured in step 5 in Value A Before Adjustment 7 Select Adjust 8 Select Sample Printout again 9 Select the tray in which you loaded paper and press the Start...

Page 711: ...ent Adjust the booklet position 1 Select Booklet and then select Change Settings 2 Select Sample Printout 3 Select the tray in which you loaded paper select 2 Sheet Stack and press the Start button A sample printout is printed 4 Select the tray in which you loaded paper select 15 Sheet Stack and press the Start button A sample printout is printed 5 Select Close 6 Check the sample printout measurin...

Page 712: ... Booklet to adjust the alignment 11 Select Adjust 12 Select Sample Printout again 13 Select the tray in which you loaded paper and press the Start button The sample printout is printed 14 Select Save 15 Confirm the result of sample printout 16 Adjust the alignment again if necessary Steps 6 to 14 17 Select Save 18 Select Close until the Services Home screen is displayed Note When you configure set...

Page 713: ...edge of the paper does not extend beyond a fold position of the paper Extending an edge of paper beyond a fold position of the paper may cause a paper jam 7 Select Adjust 8 Select Sample Printout again 9 Select the tray in which you loaded paper and press the Start button The sample printout is printed 10 Select Save 11 Confirm the same printout 12 Adjust the alignment again if necessary Step 5 to...

Page 714: ...6 Enter the values you measured in step 5 in Values A B Before Adjustment and the value to which to adjust in Desired Values A B Important Set value A and value B so that an edge of the paper does not extend beyond a fold position of the paper Extending an edge of paper beyond a fold position of the paper may cause a paper jam 7 Select Adjust 8 Select Sample Printout again 9 Select the tray in whi...

Page 715: ...ut 3 Select the tray in which you loaded paper and press the Start button A sample printout is printed 4 Select Close 5 Check the printed sample printout and measure the A and B fold position movement amounts 6 Enter the value you measured in step 5 in Values A B Before Adjustment and the value to which to adjust in Desired Values A B Important Set value B so that an edge of the paper does not ext...

Page 716: ...intout 12 Adjust the alignment again if necessary 13 Select Save 14 Select Close until the Services Home screen is displayed Note When you configure settings under System Settings or Setup and then press the Services Home button the screen directly goes back to the Services Home screen ...

Page 717: ...an example of registering an adjustment type The following screen is an example of registering an adjustment type The following table shows items that appear on the setting screen Adjustment Type Description Type A Suitable for upward curl Select this type when curl is upward in the printed results from Type B Type B Standard type for paper curl adjustment on the machine Type C Suitable for downwa...

Page 718: ...tenance 5 Select Adjust Paper Curl 6 Select a type you want to change the paper curl adjustment setting and select Change Settings 7 Select Name enter a name for the adjustment type and select Save Note We recommend that you use a name such as Uncoated 209 gsm with which you can recognize the content Scale of adjustment values Select an adjustment value depending on the degree of curl on the outpu...

Page 719: ...14 Confirm the sample printout Correct the curl adjustment value as required Note For available option on the setting screen refer to Paper Curl Adjustment Types P 717 15 Select Sample Printout again 16 Select the paper tray you loaded paper and then set Paper Feed Method Number of Sheets Front Print Density and Back Print Density 17 Press the Start button The sample printout is printed 18 Make ad...

Page 720: ...r the System Administration mode For how to enter the System Administration mode refer to System Settings Procedure P 404 3 Select Tools on the Services Home screen 4 Select System Settings Common Service Settings Paper Tray Settings 5 Select Custom Paper Settings 6 Select a paper type to adjust the transfer output value and then select Change Settings 7 Select Adjust Image Transfer and then selec...

Page 721: ...inted Note The text Side 1 or Side 2 is printed on the top right of the sample printout A two dimentional code QR code is printed on the top left corner of the sample printout A sample number is printed on the left of the sample printout When the paper size is A4 B4 or 8 5 11 the sample printout is printed on two separate sheets 11 The screen shown as below is displayed when the print job has comp...

Page 722: ...sample printout scanned once Select it after scanning sample printouts as many times as necessary If you select Start although needing to scan more times the job completes with error in the next step You can scan a sample printout at most four times regardless of the contents If you scan it more than the times you are required it adjusts image transfer by the scan data as many times as necessary t...

Page 723: ...is a blank paper and it is not charged 1 Load the paper in the tray to adjust the paper feeding position 2 Press Log In Out button 3 Enter the system administrator s user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed on the screen and select Enter displayed on the screen and select Enter When a passcode is required select Next and enter the system administrator s passcode and then select En...

Page 724: ... adjust the paper feeding position and select Save 9 Enter the number of sheets to output for adjustment and select Start 10 Registering the paper feeding position starts Papers set in step 9 are output Note When Tray 6 or Tray 7 is selected the double number of papers set in step are 9 output 11 When Register Paper Feeding Position is finished properly the screen on the right is displayed ...

Page 725: ...w to clean isn t displayed because only Clean with Paper is available 1 Press Log In Out button When you perform cleaning as a Local User skip to Step 5 2 Enter the system administrator s user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed on the screen and select Enter When a passcode is required select Next and enter the system administrator s passcode and then select Enter Note The defaul...

Page 726: ...u log in as a Local User Cleaning with Paper is started automatically Clean with Felt Selecting Start starts cleaning the fusing unit automatically Note Only System Administrator can perform this setting This cleaning method uses a felt paper inside the machine Another paper for cleaning is not required Clean with Paper Select the tray in which you load a paper for cleaning and select 1 5 for pape...

Page 727: ...ble 734 z Trouble during Copying 740 z Trouble during Printing 744 z Trouble during Scanning 747 z Network related Problems 752 z Media Print Text Trouble 760 z Media Print Photos Trouble 761 z Error Code 762 z Paper Jams 852 z Document Jams 900 z Stapler Faults 903 z Re inserting the Staple Cartridge into the Cartridge Unit 911 z Correcting the Curl of Outputs 913 ...

Page 728: ...rnet refer to EP Diagnostic Request Repair Request P 437 and Check EP Connection P 437 The machine does not work properly Yes Action Refer to Machine Trouble P 729 No A message is displayed Cause Has a paper or document jam occurred No Yes Action For information on paper jams refer to Paper Jams P 852 For information on document jams refer to Document Jams P 900 No Cause Is an error code displayed...

Page 729: ...f the error still is not resolved contact our Customer Support Center The Error indicator is lit Is paper or a document jammed Remove the jammed paper or document If paper is jammed refer to Paper Jams P 852 and a document is jammed refer to Document Jams P 900 Is the front cover or top cover open Solve the problem by following the message displayed Is a message displayed on the touch screen promp...

Page 730: ...Press the Machine Status button to check the Print Mode on the Machine Status screen If Print Mode is set to Off line select On line Is the power cord disconnected from the machine Switch the main power and power off and then firmly plug the power cord into the connector of the machine and power outlet Then switch the main power and power on Refer to Power Source P 64 Is the power breaker switch o...

Page 731: ...erview P 53 Unsatisfactory print quality A probable cause is an image defect Resolve the problem by referring to Image Quality Trouble Refer to Image Quality Trouble P 734 Unable to print text correctly Text is garbled Non standard fonts are used for printing Check the application or print driver settings Unable to insert or remove a paper tray Did you open a cover or turn the machine off during p...

Page 732: ...th paper that meets machine specifications Refer to Paper Types P 92 or Loading Paper P 104 Is paper exceeding the maximum fill line in the tray Load paper in the paper tray so that it does not exceed the maximum fill line Refer to Loading Paper P 104 Are the paper guides set correctly Load the paper correctly and align the paper guides to the paper Refer to Loading Paper P 104 Is the image nearly...

Page 733: ...ing Different Size Documents Simultaneously P 165 Is an A5 document loaded in landscape orientation on the document feeder when Mixed Size Originals is set to On Load the A5 document in portrait orientation An edge of the document is folded Is the document curled Flatten the curl and load the document again Cannot copy in color Is Output Color set to Black White Set Output Color to Color Refer to ...

Page 734: ... on the document feeder dirty Clean the constant velocity transport glass Refer to Cleaning the Narrow Glass Strip and Document Presser P 679 The copy is too dark Is the copy density set to Darken Adjust the copy density Refer to Image Quality P 153 The copy is too light Is the document faint Is the copy density set to Lighten The copy is slightly misaligned Are the paper edges aligned and the lea...

Page 735: ...ng Enlarged Reduced Copies P 140 Color shift of color copies is poor resulting in unsatisfactory image quality Is the color calibration incorrect Execute auto calibration Refer to Executing Calibration P 682 Is the machine set where it is exposed to direct sunlight If the document glass is exposed to strong light when you turn the machine on or cancel the Power Saver mode color shift may occur Clo...

Page 736: ...r to Cleaning the Narrow Glass Strip and Document Presser P 679 Dirt appears at equal intervals Paper feed direction The paper path is dirty Print a few pages to remove the dirt The drum cartridge has deteriorated or is damaged Contact our Customer Support Center White dots appear in black filled areas The paper is unsuitable Load suitable paper Refer to Loading Paper P 104 The drum cartridge has ...

Page 737: ...e the drum cartridge with a new one High voltage power supply may have malfunctioned Contact our Customer Support Center Nothing is printed Two or more sheets of paper are being fed simultaneously double feed Fan the paper well and load it again Refer to Loading Paper P 104 Power supply or high voltage power supply may have malfunctioned Contact our Customer Support Center White areas or white or ...

Page 738: ...inkled The paper is unsuitable Replace the paper with a new one Refer to Loading Paper P 104 Paper has been added to the paper loaded The paper is damp Text is blurred The paper is unsuitable Replace the paper with a new one Refer to Loading Paper P 104 Paper has been added to the paper loaded The paper is damp White or color patches appear vertically Paper feed direction The drum cartridge has de...

Page 739: ...ing 22 Text or images are printed at an angle The paper guides in the paper tray are not set in the correct positions Adjust the horizontal and vertical paper guides to the correct positions Refer to Loading Paper P 104 Symptom Cause Remedy ...

Page 740: ... does not feed irregular sized documents business cards transparencies or thin documents In addition the document feeder does not feed documents with sticky tags paper clips or adhesive tape Refer to Copying Procedure P 126 The document guides are set in incorrect positions Adjust the document guides to the document Refer to Copying Procedure P 126 A piece of torn paper remains in the document fee...

Page 741: ...ied soiling the image Place a transparency film under the document when copying The copy is too dark or light The copy density is set to Darken or Lighten Adjust the copy density Refer to Image Quality P 153 The document density is too light Adjust the copy density Refer to Copy P 140 The setting for Original Type is inappropriate for the document Copy black text If the printout is too light selec...

Page 742: ...er to Copying Procedure P 126 The paper tray is not inserted correctly Firmly push in the tray until it stops to set it properly Refer to Loading Paper P 104 The paper guides in Tray 5 are not set in the correct positions Load the paper correctly and align the paper guides to the paper edges Refer to Loading Paper in Tray 5 Bypass P 106 Unable to copy with the specified size The document glass or ...

Page 743: ...ts are not stapled The Finisher is not attached The Finisher is required to staple Install the Finisher or change the print option settings to cancel stapling The number of pages to be stapled exceeds the maximum number for stapling Reduce papers to be less than the maximum number for stapling The maximum number of pages for stapling varies depending on the used finisher Symptom Cause Remedy ...

Page 744: ...creen If Print Mode is set to Off line select On line An error occurred in the machine Check the error details and take an appropriate action The IP address or SMB network path is not correctly set Set the correct IP address or SMB network path Refer to Printer Environment Settings P 563 The network between the computer and machine is abnormal Check with your network administrator The port is not ...

Page 745: ...r stapling The maximum number of pages for stapling varies depending on the used finisher Paper is not folded The Folder Unit is not installed Check the optional components installed on the machine and reconfigure the printer configuration The document is printed on a different paper size than specified The document size is different from the paper size loaded in the specified tray Change the size...

Page 746: ...llable Options under Configuration in the print driver again The document edges are missing on the printout The image is larger than the printable area Expand the printable area of the machine or reduce the image size on the printout The print color differs from before The color calibration is incorrect Execute auto calibration Refer to Executing Calibration P 682 Black lines are printed A print d...

Page 747: ...ocuments In addition the document feeder does not feed documents with sticky tags paper clips or adhesive tape Refer to Scanning Procedure P 216 The document guides are set in incorrect positions Adjust the document guides to the document Refer to Scanning Procedure P 216 A piece of torn paper remains in the document feeder Open the document feeder cover and remove the piece Refer to Document Jams...

Page 748: ... cannot be retrieved Set the passcode to Off and then set the passcode again Refer to Create Folder P 523 Unable to import data from the scanner because of a TWAIN transmission error The scan driver is not installed Install the scan driver Operation terminates during scanning The file size is too large Lower the resolution and import again Refer to Layout Adjustment P 289 Symptom Cause Remedy ...

Page 749: ...ot correctly entered Correctly enter the password The time set on the machine does not agree with that of Windows when SMB transmission is performed to Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2012 Windows Server 2012 R2 Windows 8 or Windows 8 1 Synchronize the time settings of the machine and Windows On Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2008 Windows Server2012 Windows Server 2012 R...

Page 750: ...ail size Change the maximum e mail size or lower the resolution Refer to Maximum Total Data Size P 507 or Layout Adjustment P 289 Symptom Cause Remedy The image is dirty The document glass or the document cover is soiled Clean the document glass or the document cover Refer to Cleaning the Document Cover and Document Glass P 679 The document is a transparent type such as a transparency film If the ...

Page 751: ...t feeder are not set in the correct positions Load the document correctly and align the document guides to the document Refer to Scanning Procedure P 216 The document is a non standard size Specify the document size Refer to Scanning Procedure P 216 The document is folded Flatten the curl and load the document again Refer to Scanning Procedure P 216 The image is not scanned in color Color Scanning...

Page 752: ...er SMB machines Cause Check point Remedy If Auto Master Mode of SMB is set to On the number of machines whose information can be stored is limited The number depends on the network environment The machine or other SMB machines cannot be searched from the Network Computers icon Confirm the setting of Auto Master Mode of SMB If the setting is enabled change it to Off ...

Page 753: ...occurred during the printing process Confirm whether any error messages are displayed on the control panel Restart the machine Wait until the screen completely goes out to switch on the machine power The machine is not set to the transport protocol corresponding to the computer Confirm the transport protocol selected on the machine Select the transport protocol corresponding to the computer The ma...

Page 754: ...ernet address correctly entered Confirm the Internet address again If the problem persists enter an IP address to connect to CentreWare Internet Services Is a proxy server being used Depending on the proxy server connections may not be possible Set the browser to Not using proxy server or set that particular address to Not using a proxy server The Please wait message is continuously displayed Wait...

Page 755: ...ch Enter the correct password Restart the machine Cannot delete jobs Wait for a while and click Refresh Symptom Remedy Cannot receive e mail Print E mail Is the e mail address for the machine configured Is Receive E mail set to Enabled Are settings such as the IP addresses for the SMTP server and POP3 server if POP3 is selected as the incoming mail protocol configured correctly Are the POP3 user n...

Page 756: ...roxy server Set the IP address of a DNS server that can resolve the address of the proxy server z When not connecting via the proxy server Set the IP address of a DNS server that can resolve the destination address The address of the address that does not use a proxy server is incorrect Confirm whether only addresses that do not use a proxy server are set Even if addresses not through a proxy serv...

Page 757: ...ronment using the proxy server you must configure the machine to use the proxy server to connect to a desired Web server Make sure that you configure the settings to use the proxy server The setting to use a proxy server is configured even though the environment does not use a proxy server In an environment that does not use a proxy server such as when connecting to an intranet do not make the set...

Page 758: ... computer running Windows OS that supports IPv6 Then register the IPv6 address on the machine as host address to allow communication A device outside the router cannot be searched When searching for a device outside the router via SMB directly specify the address Multicasting is supported only within a local link FF02 1 When SSL is enabled on CentreWare Internet Services even if you specify http I...

Page 759: ...v6 address literal format Example csw ipv6 2001 db8 1 In an IPv6 environment use a DNS server and specify an e mail address using the FQDN Symptom Remedy Unable to search devices with IPv6 addresses in UPnP In an IPv6 environment use Function Discovery of Web Services on Devices WSD In an IPv6 network with no DNS server installed authentication fails if an SMB authentication server is specified us...

Page 760: ...dy Media Print Text is not displayed on the Services Home screen The optional software USB Memory Kit is not recognized by the machine Properly set the software option or disconnect the USB cable and then securely insert the USB cable into the connector Media Print in CentreWare Internet Services is not checked Check Media Print in CentreWare Internet Services to enable the service ...

Page 761: ...t the software option or disconnect the USB cable and then securely insert the USB cable into the connector A blank sheet of paper is output Files that cannot be printed image files other than DCF1 0 format are included among the files specified for printing Files that cannot be printed image files other than DCF1 0 format are not printed with index printing Specify printing again excluding the im...

Page 762: ...ntact number is printed on the label or card attached to the machine Error Code Cause and Remedy 003 311 003 318 003 319 003 320 003 321 003 322 003 323 003 324 003 325 003 326 003 327 003 328 003 329 003 330 003 331 003 332 003 333 003 334 003 335 003 336 003 337 003 338 003 339 003 340 003 341 003 342 003 343 003 344 003 345 003 346 Cause An error occurred Remedy Switch off the machine power mak...

Page 763: ...e A mix sized document was to be scanned at 600 dpi in Color 2 sided Remedy Set Resolution to 400dpi or lower and try scanning again 003 753 Cause A mix sized document was to be scanned at high resolution 2 sided Remedy Set Resolution to 200dpi and scan the document again 003 754 003 755 Cause An error occurred in the document feeder Remedy Execute the job again 003 757 Cause A mix sized document ...

Page 764: ...ill is not resolved contact our Customer Support Center 012 211 012 212 012 213 012 214 012 215 012 216 012 217 012 218 012 219 012 221 012 222 012 223 012 224 Cause Finisher malfunction Remedy Switch off the machine power make sure that the touch screen is blank and then switch on the machine power If the error still is not resolved contact our Customer Support Center 012 225 012 226 012 227 012 ...

Page 765: ...function Remedy Switch off the machine power make sure that the touch screen is blank and then switch on the machine power If the error still is not resolved contact our Customer Support Center 012 260 012 263 012 264 012 265 012 266 012 269 012 272 012 273 012 274 012 279 Cause Finisher malfunction Remedy Switch off the machine power make sure that the touch screen is blank and then switch on the...

Page 766: ...port Center 013 223 Cause An error occurred in the Square Fold Trimmer Module Remedy Open and close the Finisher Right Door and then execute the operation again If the error still is not resolved contact our Customer Support Center 013 224 013 225 013 226 013 227 013 228 013 229 013 230 013 231 013 232 013 233 013 234 013 235 013 236 013 237 013 238 013 239 013 240 013 241 013 242 013 243 013 246 ...

Page 767: ...alization of the high compression board Otherwise the high compression board is not supported on your machine Remedy Switch off the machine power make sure that the touch screen is blank and then switch on the machine power If the error still is not resolved contact our Customer Support Center 016 233 Cause An error occurred in the software Remedy Switch off the machine power make sure that the to...

Page 768: ...0 016 331 016 332 016 333 016 334 016 335 016 336 016 337 016 338 016 339 016 340 016 341 016 342 016 343 016 345 016 346 016 347 016 348 016 349 016 350 016 351 Cause An error occurred Remedy Switch off the machine power make sure that the touch screen is blank and then switch on the machine power If the same message is displayed again contact our Customer Support Center Error Code Cause and Reme...

Page 769: ...nection of Ethernet1 timed out Remedy Confirm the network connection of Ethernet1 and switch setting of the authentication device physically connected to the machine via a network and check whether it is connected to the machine correctly 016 403 016 404 Cause The root certificate of Ethernet1 did not match Remedy Confirm the authentication server and store the root certificate of the server certi...

Page 770: ...and store the root certificate of the server certificate of the authentication server into the machine If you cannot acquire the root certificate of the server certificate set Server Certificate Verification of IEEE 802 1X Settings for Ethernet2 to Disabled on the touch screen 016 431 Cause An internal error occurred Remedy Execute the operation again If the error still is not resolved contact our...

Page 771: ...t Remedy For 1 wait for a while and then execute the operation again For 2 confirm whether the source port number for SMTP is correct 016 514 Cause An error occurred during processing of an XPS document Remedy If an error occurred while printing from a driver which supports XPS print from the application using another print driver If an error occurred while direct printing an XPS document such as ...

Page 772: ...P server to a valid one You can clear this error by selecting Disabled for LDAP SSL TLS Communication under SSL TLS Settings on the machine however note that selecting this option does not ensure the validity of the LDAP server 016 525 Cause LDAP server SSL authentication error The server certificate has expired Remedy Change the SSL certificate of the LDAP server to a valid one You can clear this...

Page 773: ...ad server could not be written to the hard disk Remedy Confirm the amount of available space and delete files that are no longer required Alternatively replace the hard disk 016 539 Cause Kerberos server authentication protocol error Remedy An error occurred in the software Contact our Customer Support Center 016 543 Cause The specified domain was deleted from ApeosWare Authentication Management R...

Page 774: ...uthentication Management Remedy Contact our Customer Support Center 016 559 Cause A remote download parameter error occurred An invalid value is set for essential system data Remedy Confirm the settings for essential system data 016 560 Cause A communications error occurred between the machine and ApeosWare Authentication Management Remedy Check whether the network cable is connected and confirm t...

Page 775: ...r data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because the scanned image could not be saved in the FTP server after connection Remedy Check whether the FTP server s save location is correct 016 580 Cause The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because the file or folder name on the FTP server could not be retrieved after connection Remedy Confirm the access privilege fo...

Page 776: ...ver after connection Remedy Check whether enough space is available in the save location 016 589 Cause The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because the data could not be read from the FTP server after connection Remedy Confirm the access privilege for the FTP server 016 590 Cause The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because ther...

Page 777: ...ess print data because of insufficient memory Remedy Stop unnecessary ports or delete unnecessary data to increase memory 016 702 Cause Unable to process print data because of insufficient print page buffer Remedy Take one of the following measures z Set Image Quality to Standard z Increase the print page buffer size For more information on the Image Quality refer to the help of the print driver 0...

Page 778: ...e passcode set on the folder Remedy Enter the correct passcode 016 714 Cause The specified folder does not exist Remedy Create a new folder or specify an existing folder 016 715 Cause The machine failed to access the ESCP form because the password of the ESCP form does not match Remedy Enter the correct password of the ESCP form 016 716 Cause Unable to spool TIFF file because of insufficient hard ...

Page 779: ...the TIFF file Remedy Confirm the print data 016 729 Cause Unable to print because the number of colors or the resolution of the TIFF file exceeds the allowed range Remedy Change the number of colors or resolution for the TIFF file and execute the operation again 016 731 Cause Unable to print TIFF data because it was interrupted Remedy Retry printing 016 732 Cause The form specified by emulation ha...

Page 780: ... resolved have the Configuration Report the Job History Report and the print data with the printing job ticket ready and contact our Customer Support Center Note XPS stands for XML Paper Specification 016 751 Cause During the PDF Bridge processing a syntax or parameter error occurred an undefined command was used and a PDF file was damaged Remedy Use the print driver to print the document 016 752 ...

Page 781: ...Delete unnecessary data from the hard disk to free up disk space 016 775 Cause Unable to process image conversion because of insufficient hard disk space Remedy Delete unnecessary data from the hard disk to free up disk space 016 776 Cause An error occurred during image conversion processing Remedy For errors occurring when forwarding with Store to Folder The image conversion processing for the pa...

Page 782: ...g the Scan feature the machine could not write the file to the hard disk Remedy Take one of the following measures z Switch off the machine power make sure that the touch screen is blank and then switch on the machine power z Load paper on the paper tray as necessary z If the error occurs when sending an e mail take one of the following measures Lower the resolution Reduce the size Reduce the numb...

Page 783: ...ke sure that the touch screen is blank and then switch on the machine power Send the job again 017 705 017 706 017 707 017 708 Cause ThinPrint print SSL authentication error Remedy Check the server certificate information expiry date and address that is registered to ThinPrint print 017 709 Cause An SSL communication error occurred between ThinPrint print and the machine Remedy Check the settings ...

Page 784: ... machine exceeded the maximum receivable volume or the space for spool data was insufficient Remedy Take one of the following measures z Set to spool data to the hard disk from the setting of the storage destination machine z Set IPP under Properties General Setup Memory Settings to Spool to Hard Disk by CentreWare Internet Services z Wait for a while and send the job again 017 730 Cause When the ...

Page 785: ...y Switch off the machine power make sure that the touch screen is blank and then switch on the machine power If the same message is displayed again contact our Customer Support Center 017 741 Cause The job flow cannot be activated Remedy Take one of the following measures z Install the latest plug in z Confirm the job flow settings 017 742 Cause An error occurred while connecting to the forwarding...

Page 786: ... connection 017 759 Cause An error occurred during firmware update in the machine Remedy Contact our Customer Support Center 017 760 Cause An error occurred in connecting to the POP3 server Probable causes are follows 1 When connecting to the POP3 server by the TLS communication the port number is incorrect 2 When connecting to the POP3 server by the SSL communication an internal error occurred Re...

Page 787: ...achine If the time matches use the valid server certificate 017 770 Cause The server addresses of the POP3 server and the server certificate are not same Remedy Use the valid server certificate in which the correct server address is written 017 771 Cause An error occurred Remedy Execute the operation again If the error still is not resolved contact our Customer Support Center 017 772 Cause The sca...

Page 788: ...y exists in the network of Ethernet2 Remedy Change the IPv4 address of Ethernet2 018 409 Cause The IPv6 address already exists in the network of Ethernet2 Remedy Change the IPv6 address of the network in which the address already exists 018 410 Cause Updating of the IPv4 address and host name for the DNS server failed on the network of Ethernet2 Remedy Check whether the IP address of the DNS serve...

Page 789: ... Windows users becomes available For information about necessary accounting settings consult your system administrator The following is an example of a procedure for Mac OS X 10 6 Note It is recommended that users create a dedicated account for data transfer You can create and set the account on the dialog box that appears by choosing Apple menu System Preferences and then clicking Accounts icon 1...

Page 790: ...ke sure that File Sharing check box is selected 3 Select the folder being shared from folders listed in the Shared Folders field 4 Choose Read Write as privilege option for the user listed in the Users field Note For information on how to change the access privilege settings on other version of Mac OS consult your system administrator or the official website of Apple Inc 018 547 Cause The machine ...

Page 791: ...ument is accessible by PC z The server settings 018 564 Cause DNS resolution for the specified hostname failed Remedy Check the followings z The destination HTTP server for the scanned document is registered on the DNS server z The machine is connected to the DNS server z The address of the DNS server is set on the machine 018 565 Cause DNS resolution for the proxy server name set on the machine f...

Page 792: ...lient certificate is registered on the machine z The device certificate is correctly registered on the HTTP server 018 571 Cause An internal error occurred Remedy Perform the same operation again If the problem persists contact our Customer Support Center 018 572 Cause The specified context name contains invalid characters Remedy Check whether the specified context name is correct 018 573 Cause Th...

Page 793: ...he file z The login user does not have Write rights to the file z The login user does not have Delete rights of the directory or file z Made a delete request to the directories or files but all of them are read only z Made a delete request to the directories or files but some of them are read only Remedy 1 Check whether the NetWare server is accessible by PC 2 Check the user has the following righ...

Page 794: ...mes are duplicate confirm that the file format is not multi page 018 589 Cause Failed to access the NEXTNAME DAT file Remedy When Rename New File is set as the process to be executed when file names are duplicate check the NEXTNAME DAT file is correct 018 590 Cause A file or folder of the same name was detected on the server Remedy Take one of the following measures 1 Execute the operation again b...

Page 795: ... again If the error still is not resolved consult your network administrator 018 704 Cause An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address Book operation The server returned RFC2251 Result Message No 4 size limit exceeded for Address Book query Remedy Change the search conditions start position to narrow the search range and execute the operation again If the error still is not r...

Page 796: ...nal status of the server 018 713 Cause An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address Book operation The server returned RFC2251 Result Message No 13 confidentiality required for Address Book query Remedy Have your network administrator confirm the operational status of the server 018 714 Cause An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address Book operation The ...

Page 797: ...loud Print because of a network error Remedy Check that the network cable is connected properly Also check that the environmental settings are adequate 018 723 Cause The machine cannot connect to Google Cloud Print because of a certificate error Remedy Check that the root CA certificate registered to the machine and the certificate verification settings are correct 018 724 Cause The machine cannot...

Page 798: ...Have your network administrator confirm the LDAP server status 018 734 Cause An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address Book operation The server returned RFC2251 Result Message No 34 invalid DN syntax for Address Book query Remedy The LDAP server has a name problem Confirm the user name and password to cancel an incorrect password If the error still is not resolved have you...

Page 799: ...over subnet confirm the WINS server settings and check whether the server address can be resolved correctly z Confirm the file Sharing service communicating via port 137 UDP port 138 UDP and port 139 TCP is authorized for the transferring destination server router between the machine and server and virus security software or firewall software on the forwarding destination server 018 748 Cause An L...

Page 800: ...e destination does not respond to the machine while transferring data using SMB of the Scan to PC service Remedy Confirm the file Sharing service communicating via port 139 TCP and port 445 TCP is authorized for the transferring destination server router between the machine and server and virus security software or firewall software on the forwarding destination server 018 756 Cause A response fro...

Page 801: ...h are not used 018 762 Cause A time out error occurred because it takes time to receive a response from the saving destination PC while transferring data using SMB of the Scan to PC service Remedy Check whether the virus security software is working on the saving destination PC Some software takes time to receive a response from the PC If the software is working reduce the number of document pages...

Page 802: ...fications for Address Book query Remedy The LDAP server has an update problem Have your network administrator confirm the LDAP server status 018 770 Cause An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address Book operation The server returned RFC2251 Result Message No 70 results too large for Address Book query Remedy Change the search conditions start position to narrow the search ra...

Page 803: ... how to change the access privilege settings on other version of Mac OS consult your system administrator or the official website of Apple Inc 018 780 Cause An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address Book operation The server returned RFC2251 Result Message No 80 unknown error for Address Book query Remedy Have your network administrator confirm the LDAP server status 018 78...

Page 804: ... Remedy Have your network administrator confirm the LDAP server status 018 790 Cause An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address Book operation The server returned RFC2251 Result Message No 90 no memory for Address Book query Remedy Have your network administrator confirm the LDAP server status 018 791 Cause An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address Bo...

Page 805: ...ypted communication between the machine and the USB memory device Remedy Switch off the machine power make sure that the touch screen is blank and then switch on the machine power Execute the operation again If the error still is not resolved contact our Customer Support Center 021 215 Cause The accounting billing device connected does not match the device set on the machine Remedy Change the sett...

Page 806: ...normally but the error still is not resolved contact our Customer Support Center Also when FQDN of the EP communication aggregate server is changed for the EP communication aggregate server configuration contact our Customer Support Center 021 405 Cause An error occurred in the SSL communication with the external server Remedy Switch off the machine power make sure that the touch screen is blank a...

Page 807: ...er 021 410 021 411 Cause A communication error occurred while connecting acquiring the EP certificate to CA via the Internet Remedy Check the followings z LAN cable connection z DNS server address setting z The default gateway setting z The subnet mask setting z EP proxy server setting For BB Direct configuration If the error still is not resolved after checking the above settings there may be a n...

Page 808: ...nternet Remedy Check the followings z The LAN cable connection z The DNS server address settings z The default gateway setting z The subnet mask setting z The EP proxy server setting If the error still is not resolved after checking the above settings there may be a network failure Consult your system administrator If the network works normally but the error still is not resolved contact our Custo...

Page 809: ...e HTTP proxy server in which the proxy setting file is registered If the error still is not resolved after checking the above settings there may be a network failure Consult your system administrator If the network works normally but the error still is not resolved contact our Customer Support Center 021 422 Cause The proxy setting file is not found while connecting to the EP system via the Intern...

Page 810: ...egistered If the error still is not resolved after checking the above settings there may be a network failure Consult your system administrator If the network works normally but the error still is not resolved contact our Customer Support Center 021 426 Cause The URL CURL of the proxy setting file is not found on the DHCP or DNS server while connecting to the EP system via the Internet to obtain t...

Page 811: ... changed or failed Consult your system administrator If the network works normally but the error still is not resolved contact our Customer Support Center 021 505 Cause The SSL TLS communication with the EP server failed Remedy Switch off the machine power make sure that the touch screen is blank and then switch on the machine power If the error still is not resolved contact our Customer Support C...

Page 812: ...te the operation again If the error still is not resolved contact our Customer Support Center 021 515 021 516 Cause The settings of the machine on the EP server are incorrect Remedy Switch off the machine power make sure that the touch screen is blank and then switch on the machine power Execute the operation again If the error still is not resolved contact our Customer Support Center 021 517 021 ...

Page 813: ...since the machine power was off at the reserved time Remedy Check with your system administrators If the system administrators have not reserved the update contact our Customer Support Center 021 540 Cause The SW upgrade was canceled since the machine power was turned off while downloading the update file Remedy If necessary execute the operation again 021 541 Cause The SW upgrade cannot be starte...

Page 814: ...wing measures z For 1 insert the IC card z For 2 prepare the enough amount of charge z For 3 log in to the machine with the smart card or on the control panel 021 733 Cause The use of color is restricted or the number of color pages reached the maximum Remedy Contact our Customer Support Center 021 750 021 751 021 770 021 771 021 772 Cause An error occurred during maintenance or repair request and...

Page 815: ...r hard disk required to use the optional feature is not installed Remedy Switch off the machine power and then switch it on again after the touch screen goes out If the error still is not resolved contact our Customer Support Center 024 701 Cause The specified paper type is not compatible with the Face Up Down Output setting selected Remedy Specify a paper type that is compatible with the Face Up ...

Page 816: ...ge the printer properties setting to split the pages appropriately to create separate volumes or to cancel the booklet creation setting 025 596 025 597 Cause An error occurred with the hard disk Remedy Replace the hard disk 026 400 Cause More than two devices are connected to the USB host port Remedy Disconnect the third or more devices so that the number of connected devices becomes two If the er...

Page 817: ...as A3 A4 and then execute the operation again 3 If Store Send Link Maximum File Size is set to a small value increase the value 026 709 Cause The capacity of the hard disk that can be used to store scan data with Store Send Link is insufficient Remedy Wait around one day and when capacity becomes available as a result of the automatic deletion of files execute the operation again 026 710 Cause The...

Page 818: ...er Support Center 026 726 Cause The machine configuration information at a print job specification does not match the actual machine configuration Remedy Modify the machine configuration information in the print driver screen to match the actual machine configuration 026 727 Cause Probable causes are as follows 1 Unusable characters are included in the path name of the file location 2 The length o...

Page 819: ...447 Cause The IP address of IPv6 on the Ethernet2 network already exists Remedy Change the Link local Address for IPv6 on the machine or the IP address of IPv6 on the network device to remove the duplication of addresses 027 452 Cause IP address of IPv4 already exists Remedy Change the IP address of IPv4 set on the machine or the IP address of IPv4 on the network device 027 500 Cause Unable to con...

Page 820: ...f the destination SMB server 2 Check whether the file sharing service is enabled on the destination SMB server The file sharing service of Microsoft Network is enabled If the error still is not resolved check the following setting NetBIOS over TCP IP for TCP IP is activated 3 Take one of the following measures When the destination SMB server name is specified using the FQDN example mypc01 fuji0 co...

Page 821: ... the following reasons z The file does not exist z The file is opened z The specified file name is being used as a directory Remedy Check whether the file is not being used by another user at the specified save location 027 526 Cause The machine failed to delete the lock directory on the SMB server while transferring data using SMB of the Scan to PC service Remedy If the lock directory LCK exists ...

Page 822: ...or occurred during transferring using SMB of the Scan to PC service Consult your network administrator whether the domain name specified when entering login name is correct To confirm the domain name on the server execute the following procedures 1 Select Start Programs Administrative Tools Active Directory Domains and Trusts on the Active Directory domain controller 2 From the left side frame of ...

Page 823: ...again If the error still is not resolved contact our Customer Support Center 027 584 Cause SMB protocol error The SMB server is in shared security mode Remedy The SMB server may be set on Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows Me OS Set the SMB server on an OS other than Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows Me OS 027 585 Cause SMB protocol error Login is disabled at this time Remedy Confirm the period login...

Page 824: ...l Remedy Ask the sender to issue a new S MIME certificate and then import the certificate to the machine 027 708 Cause The S MIME certificate associated with the machine s e mail address is not reliable when sending e mail Remedy Import a reliable S MIME certificate to the machine 027 709 Cause The S MIME certificate associated with the machine s e mail address has been discarded when sending e ma...

Page 825: ...w Service failed Remedy Confirm the user name and password that is used when creating a job flow 027 724 Cause An application interface destination ApeosWare Flow Service could not be accessed Remedy Check whether ApeosWare Flow Service is operating correctly If it is operating correctly confirm the log 027 725 Cause A job operation failed using an application interface Remedy Check whether the ap...

Page 826: ...flow Remedy Check the DocuWorks and PDF signatures for both the system data settings machine s current settings and the executed job flow settings If these settings differ coordinate them 027 757 Cause Probable causes are as follows 1 An error occurred while connecting the server 2 The reliable certificate has not been registered on the machine 3 The server addresses of the SSL server and the dest...

Page 827: ...eration to the job ticket Remedy Execute the print job again If the error still is not resolved contact our Customer Support Center 027 763 Cause The user information does not match between the external accounting server and remote authentication server Remedy Take one of the following measures z Check whether the external accounting server and the remote authentication server is working appropria...

Page 828: ... SMTP server Remedy Confirm the login name and password set to SMTP AUTH 027 796 Cause The received e mail was discarded because no documents were attached to it The machine is set to print attached documents only Remedy To print the mail body or header information also change settings in the Properties screen of CentreWare Internet Services Refer to E mail Printing P 389 027 797 Cause The output ...

Page 829: ...042 375 042 376 042 377 042 378 042 379 042 380 042 381 042 382 042 383 042 384 042 385 042 386 042 387 042 388 042 389 042 390 042 391 042 392 042 393 042 394 042 395 042 397 042 399 Cause An error occurred in the machine Remedy Switch off the machine power make sure that the touch screen is blank and then switch on the machine power If the error still is not resolved contact our Customer Support...

Page 830: ... switch on the machine power If the error still is not resolved contact our Customer Support Center 044 310 044 311 044 312 044 313 044 314 044 315 044 316 044 317 044 318 044 319 044 320 044 321 044 322 044 323 044 324 044 325 044 326 Cause An error occurred in the machine Remedy Switch off the machine power make sure that the touch screen is blank and then switch on the machine power If the erro...

Page 831: ...ct our Customer Support Center 045 310 045 311 Cause An error occurred in the machine Remedy Switch off the machine power make sure that the touch screen is blank and then switch on the machine power If the same message is displayed again contact our Customer Support Center 045 390 045 391 Cause An error occurred in the cooling fan Remedy Switch off the machine power make sure that the touch scree...

Page 832: ...e machine Remedy Switch off the machine power make sure that the touch screen is blank and then switch on the machine power If the same message is displayed again contact our Customer Support Center 048 310 048 311 048 312 048 313 048 314 048 315 048 316 048 317 048 318 048 319 048 320 048 321 048 322 048 323 048 324 Cause An error occurred in the interface module Remedy Turn the machine off and t...

Page 833: ...49 237 049 238 049 239 049 240 049 241 049 242 049 243 049 248 049 251 049 252 049 253 049 280 049 281 049 282 049 283 049 284 049 285 049 286 049 287 049 288 049 310 Cause A hardware malfunction occurred in the High Capacity Stacker Remedy Turn the machine off and then on and execute the operation again If the error still is not resolved contact our Customer Support Center Error Code Cause and Re...

Page 834: ...ror occurred in the machine Remedy Switch off the machine power make sure that the touch screen is blank and then switch on the machine power If the error still is not resolved contact our Customer Support Center 060 325 060 326 060 328 060 330 060 331 060 332 060 333 060 334 060 339 060 340 Cause An error occurred in the machine Remedy Switch off the machine power make sure that the touch screen ...

Page 835: ...machine power If the same message is displayed again contact our Customer Support Center 062 790 Cause Copying of the scanned document is prohibited Remedy Refer to Legal Notice in the Safety Notes 063 210 Cause An error occurred in the document feeder Remedy Contact our Customer Support Center 065 210 Cause An error occurred in the machine Remedy Contact our Customer Support Center 065 221 065 22...

Page 836: ...edy Switch off the machine power make sure that the touch screen is blank and then switch on the machine power If the same message is displayed again contact our Customer Support Center 077 325 077 326 077 332 077 333 Cause An error occurred in the machine Remedy Switch off the machine power make sure that the touch screen is blank and then switch on the machine power If the same message is displa...

Page 837: ...and then switch on the machine power If the error still is not resolved contact our Customer Support Center 078 250 Cause An error occurred in Tray 6 HCF Remedy Switch off the machine power make sure that the touch screen is blank and then switch on the machine power If the error still is not resolved contact our Customer Support Center 078 251 Cause An error occurred in Tray 6 HCF Remedy Confirm ...

Page 838: ...displayed again contact our Customer Support Center 091 313 Cause An error occurred Remedy Switch off the machine power make sure that the touch screen is blank and then switch on the machine power If the same message is displayed again contact our Customer Support Center 091 318 091 319 091 321 091 322 091 323 Cause An error occurred in the machine Remedy Switch off the machine power make sure th...

Page 839: ...blank and then switch on the machine power If the error still is not resolved contact our Customer Support Center 093 332 Cause The toner cartridge M magenta is not finished with replacement Remedy Switch off the machine power make sure that the touch screen is blank and then switch on the machine power If the error still is not resolved contact our Customer Support Center 093 333 Cause The toner ...

Page 840: ...354 099 355 099 356 099 357 099 358 099 359 099 360 099 361 099 362 099 363 099 364 099 365 099 368 099 371 099 372 Cause An error occurred in the machine Remedy Switch off the machine power make sure that the touch screen is blank and then switch on the machine power If the error still is not resolved contact our Customer Support Center Error Code Cause and Remedy ...

Page 841: ...t our Customer Support Center 103 310 103 311 103 312 103 313 Cause An error occurred in the machine Remedy Switch off the machine power make sure that the touch screen is blank and then switch on the machine power If the same message is displayed again contact our Customer Support Center 103 314 Cause An error occurred in the machine Remedy Switch off the machine power make sure that the touch sc...

Page 842: ... print data that caused the error If the error was caused by another reason switch off the machine power make sure that the touch screen is blank and then switch on the machine power If the error still is not resolved contact our Customer Support Center 116 325 116 328 116 329 116 330 116 331 116 332 116 333 116 334 116 336 116 337 116 338 Cause An error occurred Remedy Switch off the machine powe...

Page 843: ...t the touch screen is blank and then switch on the machine power If the same message is displayed again contact our Customer Support Center 116 387 Cause An error occurred in the machine Remedy Switch off the machine power make sure that the touch screen is blank and then switch on the machine power If the same message is displayed again contact our Customer Support Center 116 388 Cause The hard d...

Page 844: ...print job was processed using a substitute font Remedy Check the print data 116 704 116 705 116 706 116 707 116 708 116 709 Cause An error occurred when reading data on the media Remedy Use a computer to confirm the content recorded on the media 116 710 Cause The correct document size could not be judged because the receive data exceeded the HP GL 2 spool size Remedy Increase the size assigned to ...

Page 845: ...form specified is not registered Remedy Use the form registered or register the form 116 747 Cause The paper margin value is too large for the HP GL 2 active coordinates area Remedy Decrease the paper margin value and then execute the operation again 116 748 Cause There is no plot data in the HP GL 2 print data Remedy Check the print data 116 749 Cause The job was cancelled because the specified f...

Page 846: ...ause An error occurred between the machine and the related device Remedy Disconnect the related device from the machine and then restart the machine Select an option other than Login to Remote Accounts under Tools Authentication Security Settings Authentication Login Type 117 347 Cause The life of the component which cannot be replaced is expired The machine itself needs to be replaced Remedy Cont...

Page 847: ...n are as follows z Both the USB IC card reader and the EP related equipment are used z Login to Local Accounts is set to Login Type z Smart Card or Control Panel Login is set to When Smart Card Reader is Connected Remedy Take one of the following measures z When both Smart Card and Control Panel Login are not used the setting of When Smart Card Reader is Connected will be automatically changed to ...

Page 848: ...3 371 123 374 123 377 123 379 123 380 123 381 123 382 123 383 123 384 123 389 123 390 123 392 123 393 123 395 123 396 123 397 123 398 123 399 Cause An error occurred in the machine Remedy Switch off the machine power make sure that the touch screen is blank and then switch on the machine power If the same message is displayed again contact our Customer Support Center Error Code Cause and Remedy ...

Page 849: ...0 124 341 124 342 124 343 124 344 124 345 124 346 124 347 124 348 124 349 124 350 124 351 124 352 124 353 124 354 124 355 124 360 124 361 124 362 124 363 124 372 124 373 124 374 124 380 124 381 124 382 Cause An error occurred in the machine Remedy Switch off the machine power make sure that the touch screen is blank and then switch on the machine power If the same message is displayed again contac...

Page 850: ...er Support Center 124 709 Cause The document exceeded the maximum number of pages that can be stapled Remedy Reduce the number of pages or cancel the stapling setting then try printing again 124 710 Cause The machine cannot output to the output destination specified A paper size or a paper type that cannot be output is specified or the output destination fails Remedy No measure is required The mac...

Page 851: ...lding down both the Start and Stop buttons simultaneously for six seconds This deletes the print data that caused the error If the error still is not resolved contact our Customer Support Center Error Code Cause and Remedy Error Message Cause and Remedy A fault has occurred Switch off the machine xxx yyy Cause An error occurred Remedy Switch off the machine power make sure that the touch screen is...

Page 852: ... the Transport Unit V1 866 Paper Jams in C3 Finisher or C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker 868 Paper Jams in the Finisher D4 the Finisher D4 with Booklet or the Finisher D5 873 Paper Jams in the Interface Module 885 Paper Jams in the High Capacity Stacker 887 Paper Jams in the Squarefold Trimmer Module 894 Paper Jams in the Finishing Transport Module 896 Important When a paper jam occurs paper is some...

Page 853: ...paper jam occurs Follow the massage to remove the paper jam Paper Jams in Trays 1 to 3 The following describes how to clear paper jams in Tray 1 as an example 1 Pull out the tray where the paper jam occurred Important Paper is sometimes torn and remains inside the machine Pulling out the paper tray without checking the location of the paper jam may cause the machine to malfunction So always check ...

Page 854: ... in the right figure It may cause paper jams or machine malfunctions Paper Jams in the Transfer Module Important Before pulling out the transfer module check the touch screen to make sure that no paper remains in the left right cover of the machine Tray 5 Bypass the output exit the optional high capacity feeder or finisher Paper may be torn if paper remains in these locations when the transfer mod...

Page 855: ...the visible jammed paper 1 If the paper is jammed in the area 2a remove it in the arrow direction Important If the paper is removed in the opposite direction toner on the paper may be attached to the unit Note If paper is torn check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine 2 If the paper is jammed in the area 2c remove it in the arrow direction Important If the paper is removed in the oppos...

Page 856: ...o their original position 8 Insert the transfer module completely 1 and turn the green handle 2 to the left 2 9 Close the machine front door Note A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the machine front door is even slightly open Paper Jams in the Bottom Left Door 1 When the following option is installed perform the following procedure If not proceed to step 2 When the HCF...

Page 857: ...ne 4 Remove the lower jammed paper if there is Note If paper is torn check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine 5 Close the bottom left door Note A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the bottom left door is even slightly open 6 When the following option is installed perform the following When the HCF B1 is installed 1 Slowly return the HCF B1 to its original p...

Page 858: ...s installed perform the following procedure before opening the bottom right door If not proceed to step 2 When the C3 Finisher or the C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker is installed 1 Make sure that the machine has stopped and open the front door of the Transport Unit V1 2 Pull the handle 1a to the right When the Interface Module is installed 1 Make sure that the machine has stopped and open the front...

Page 859: ...ne while printing with a long length paper the paper may be jammed inside the machine Remove the jammed paper with the following procedure 1 Close the machine cover 2 Wait until the paper is moved to the transfer unit automatically Note After the paper is moved to the transfer unit a new message appears on the screen 3 Pull the transfer unit and remove the paper Note To prevent the paper from tear...

Page 860: ...p left side of Tray 6 2 Remove the jammed paper Note If paper is torn check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine 3 Gently put Tray 6 back into position Paper Jams in Tray 6 Top Cover 1 Gently move Tray 6 to the left until it stops by gripping the handle on the top left side of Tray 6 2 Pull up the handle 1 and open Tray 6 top cover 2 1 2 ...

Page 861: ...The following describes how to clear paper jams in the optional HCF B1 S Tray 6 or High Capacity Feeder C3 DS Trays 6 and 7 The following shows the reference for the procedure Paper Jams in Tray 5 Bypass 862 Paper Jams in Trays 6 and 7 862 Paper Jams at the Handle 1a and the Knob 1c 863 Paper Jams at the Handle 1b and the Knob 1c 864 Paper Jams at the Handle 1d and the Knob 1c 864 Note A remedy di...

Page 862: ...remove the jammed paper and all paper loaded in the tray Note If paper is torn check for any torn pieces in the tray 4 Close the top cover of Tray 5 Bypass 5 Align all four corners of the removed paper neatly 6 Insert the paper into the tray with the printing side facing up and place the leading edge of the paper against the paper feed entrance Note Do not load paper exceeding the maximum fill lin...

Page 863: ...e Handle 1a and the Knob 1c 1 Open the front door of the High Capacity Feeder 2 Move the handle 1a to the right 1 and turn the knob 1c to the right 2 Remove the jammed paper Note If paper is torn check for any torn pieces of paper in the tray 3 Return the handle 1a to its original position CAUTION When pulling out the paper tray do it slowly If pulled out with too much force the tray can hit and i...

Page 864: ...Capacity Feeder 2 Move the handle 1b to the right 1 and turn the knob 1c to the right 2 Remove the jammed paper Note If paper is torn check for any torn pieces of paper in the tray 3 Return the handle 1b to its original position 4 Close the front door of the High Capacity Feeder Note If the front door of the High Capacity Feeder is not completely closed a message will appear and the machine will n...

Page 865: ...ved in step 2 turn the knob 1c to the right 1 and remove the jammed paper 2 Note If paper is torn check for any torn pieces of paper in the tray 4 Return the handle 1d to its original position 5 Close the front door of the High Capacity Feeder Note If the front door of the High Capacity Feeder is not completely closed a message will appear and the machine will not operate Paper Jams in the Inserte...

Page 866: ...rn pieces of paper inside the machine If a paper jam occurs frequently reduce the air volume of the Catch Tray Fan optional When you use paper of 80 gsm or less for example set the volume at the Zero turning fully the knob to the left or at the Low turning the knob from the Zero to the right by 90 degrees When you use coated or heavyweight paper printed sheets output into the tray are more prone t...

Page 867: ...ndle 1c to the right 1 and turn the knob 1b to the right 2 3 Remove the jammed paper Note If paper is torn check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine 4 Return the handle 1c to its original position 5 Close the Transport Unit V1 front door Note A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the Transport Unit V1 front door is even slightly open Paper Jams at the Handle 1...

Page 868: ... how to clear staple jams inside the finisher when the C3 Finisher optional or the C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker optional is installed Paper Jams at the Handle 3a 868 Paper Jams at the Handle 3a Using the Knob 3b 869 Paper Jams at the Handle 3c 870 Paper Jams at the Handle 3d 871 Paper Jams at the Handle 3d when the paper is ejected at the output area 872 Paper Jams at the Booklet Unit 4 For C3 F...

Page 869: ...on 4 Close the finisher front door Note If the finisher front door is not completely closed a message will appear and the machine remains paused Paper Jams at the Handle 3a Using the Knob 3b 1 Open the finisher front door 2 Move the handle 3a upward 1 and remove the jammed paper Note If paper is torn check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine 3 Turn the knob 3b to the left 1 and eject t...

Page 870: ... door Note If the finisher front door is not completely closed a message will appear and the machine remains paused Paper Jams at the Handle 3c 1 If you can see the edge of the jammed paper on the output tray gently pull the paper straight from the exit area to remove If the paper cannot be removed or the paper is not ejected at the output area proceed to step 2 2 Open the finisher front door 3 Mo...

Page 871: ... completely closed a message will appear and the machine remains paused Paper Jams at the Handle 3d 1 Open the finisher front door 2 Move the handle 3d to the right 3 Remove the jammed paper Note If paper is torn check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine 4 Return the handle 3d to its original position 5 Close the finisher front door Note If the finisher front door is not completely clo...

Page 872: ...of paper inside the machine Paper Jams at the Booklet Unit 4 For C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker 1 Open the finisher front door 2 Pull out the booklet unit 4 3 Turn the knob 4a to the left 1 and remove all the jammed paper 2 4 Return the booklet unit 4 to its original position 5 Close the finisher front door Note If the finisher front door is not completely closed a message will appear and the mach...

Page 873: ...ing in the finisher when the Finisher D4 optional the Finisher D4 with Booklet optional or the Finisher D5 optional is installed Furthermore the following describes how to clear paper jams in the D4 D5 Folder Unit The following describes how to clear paper jams in the Finisher D4 with Booklet as an example The procedure is the same as for the Finisher D4 or the Finishr D5 The following shows the r...

Page 874: ...t the Unit 4 and the Knob 4a 884 Note A remedy differs depending on where the paper jam occurs Follow the instructions displayed and remove the jammed paper Paper Jams at the Handle 1a and the Knob 1c 1 Make sure that the machine has stopped and open the finisher left door 2 Move the handle 1a downwards 1 and turn the knob 1c to the left 2 Remove the jammed paper Note If paper is torn check for an...

Page 875: ...the left 2 and remove the jammed paper Note If paper is torn check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine 3 Return the handle 1d to its original position 4 Close the finisher door Note A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the finisher left door is even slightly open Paper Jams at the Handle 1b knob 1c 1 Make sure that the machine has stopped and open the finishe...

Page 876: ...finisher left door Note A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the finisher left door is even slightly open Paper Jams at the Handles 3b 3d and Knob 3a 1 Make sure that the machine has stopped and open the finisher right door 2 Move the handles 3b and 3d 1 turn the Knob 3a to the right 2 and remove the jammed paper Note If paper is torn check for any torn pieces of paper i...

Page 877: ...ight 2 Remove the jammed paper Note If paper is torn check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine If you cannot see jammed paper check handle 1d and 3b 3d as well When the D4 D5 Folder Unit is installed check the handle 2a as well 3 Return the handle 3e to its original position 4 Close the finisher right door Note A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the finishe...

Page 878: ... 3g to its original position 4 Close the finisher right door Note A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the finisher right door is even slightly open Paper Jams at the Unit 3g and the Knob 3c 1 Make sure that the machine has stopped and open the finisher right door 2 Move the handle 3g 1 and turn the knob 3c to the right 2 Remove the jammed paper Note If paper is torn che...

Page 879: ...d open the finisher right door 2 Move the handle 4b 1 and turn the knob 3a to the right 2 Remove the jammed paper Note If paper is torn check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine If you cannot see jammed paper check handle 1d and Unit 4 as well When the D4 D5 Folder Unit is installed check the handle 2a as well 3 Return the handle 4b to its original position 4 Close the finisher right d...

Page 880: ... Finisher Tray 1 Remove jammed paper from the finisher tray Note If paper is torn check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine 2 Open and close the finisher right door Note A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the finisher right door is even slightly open Paper Jams at the Booklet Output Tray 1 Make sure that the machine has stopped and open the finisher right d...

Page 881: ... door 2 Move the handle 2a 1 and turn the knob 3a to the left 2 Remove the jammed paper Note If paper is torn check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine If you cannot see jammed paper check handle 2g as well 3 Return the handle 2a to its original position 4 Close the finisher right door Note A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the finisher right door is even ...

Page 882: ... 4 Close the left cover of the Finisher Note A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the finisher right door is even slightly open Paper Jams at the Handle 2b 1 Make sure that the machine has stopped and open the finisher right door 2 Move the handle 2b Remove the jammed paper Note If paper is torn check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine If you cannot see jamm...

Page 883: ...move the jammed paper Note If paper is torn check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine 3 If you cannot remove the paper in step 2 return the handle 2e to the original position and then move the handle 2f 1 Turn the knob 2c to the left 2 and remove the jammed paper Note If paper is torn check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine 4 Return the opened handle 2f or 2e to the origi...

Page 884: ... jammed paper Note If paper is torn check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine If you cannot see jammed paper check handle 2f as well 3 Return the handle 2g to its original position 1 and push back the tri fold output tray 2d 2 4 Close the finisher right door Note A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the finisher right door is even slightly open Paper Jams at ...

Page 885: ...her right door is even slightly open Paper Jams in the Interface Module The following describes how to replace paper jams in the Interface Module when the Finisher D4 optional the Finisher D4 with Booklet optional the Finisher D5 optional or the High Capacity Stacker optional is installed Paper Jams at the Handle 1a 885 Paper Jams at the Handle 2b 886 Paper Jams at the Handle 2a 887 Note A remedy ...

Page 886: ...ndle 2b downwards and turn the knob 2c to the left 3 Return the handle 1a to its original position 4 Close the front door of the Interface Module Paper Jams at the Handle 2b 1 Open the front door of the Interface Module 2 Pull down the handle 2b 1 turn the knob 2c to the left 2 and then remove the jammed paper 3 Return the handle 2b to its original position ...

Page 887: ... Jams in the High Capacity Stacker If paper jams inside the High Capacity Stacker optional the lamp of the jammed position lights up Follow the paper jam procedure corresponding to the lighting lamp When the Lamp E1 is Lit 888 When the Lamp E2 is Lit 888 When the Lamp E3 is Lit 889 When the Lamp E4 is Lit 890 When the Lamp E5 is Lit 891 When the Lamp E6 is Lit 891 When the Lamp E7 is Lit 892 When ...

Page 888: ...t top cover of the High Capacity Stacker 2 Move the handle 1b upwards and remove the jammed paper 3 Return the handle 1b to its original position 4 Close the front top cover of the High Capacity Stacker When the Lamp E2 is Lit 1 Open the front top cover of the High Capacity Stacker ...

Page 889: ...3 Return the handle 1b to its original position 4 Close the front top cover of the High Capacity Stacker When the Lamp E3 is Lit 1 Open the front top cover of the High Capacity Stacker 2 Move the handle 1b upwards 1 turn the knob 1a to the left 2 and remove the jammed paper 3 Return the handle 1b to its original position ...

Page 890: ...ove the jammed paper 5 Return the handle 2b to its original position 6 Close the front top cover of the High Capacity Stacker When the Lamp E4 is Lit 1 Open the front top cover of the High Capacity Stacker 2 Move the handle 2a downwards and remove the jammed paper 3 Return the handle 2a to its original position ...

Page 891: ...s Lit 1 Open the front top cover of the High Capacity Stacker 2 Move the handle 2b upwards 1 turn the knob 2c to the left 2 and remove the jammed paper 3 Return the handle 2b to its original position 4 Close the front top cover of the High Capacity Stacker When the Lamp E6 is Lit 1 Press the paper eject button ...

Page 892: ...en open it 3 Pull out the stacker cart gently and remove the jammed paper 4 Push the stacker cart back into its original position 5 Close the stacker front door When the Lamp E7 is Lit 1 Remove any paper delivered to the stacker s output tray 2 Open the front top cover of the High Capacity Stacker ...

Page 893: ... 4 Return the handle 1b to its original position 5 Move the handle 2a downwards and remove the jammed paper 6 Return the handle 2a to its original position 7 Close the front top cover of the High Capacity Stacker When the Lamp E8 is Lit 1 Open the front top cover of the High Capacity Stacker ...

Page 894: ...s inside the Squarefold Trimmer Module optional the lamp of the jammed position lights up Follow the paper jam clearance procedure corresponding to the lighting lamp When the Lamp E1 or E2 is Lit 894 When the Lamp E3 is Lit 896 Note A remedy differs depending on where the paper jam occurs Follow the instructions displayed and remove the jammed paper When the Lamp E1 or E2 is Lit 1 Make sure that t...

Page 895: ...inisher right door 4 Turn the knob 4a to the right and then remove the jammed paper 5 Close the left cover of the Trimmer unit 6 If you opened the finisher right door in step 3 close the finisher right door Note A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the finisher right door is even slightly open ...

Page 896: ...ote A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the right cover of the Trimmer unit is even slightly open Paper Jams in the Finishing Transport Module If paper jams inside the Finishing Transport Module Optional the lamp of the jammed position lights up Follow the paper jam clearance procedure corresponding to the lighting lamp When the Lamp 1 is Lit 897 When the Lamp 2 is Lit ...

Page 897: ...amp 1 is Lit 1 Open the cover of the Finishing Transport Module 2 Open lever 1 downward and remove jammed paper 3 Return lever 1 to its original position 4 Close the Cover When the Lamp 2 is Lit 1 Open the cover of the Finishing Transport Module ...

Page 898: ...d turn the knob counterclockwise 1 Remove jammed paper 3 Return lever 2 to its original position 4 Close the Cover When the Lamp 3 is Lit 1 Open the cover of the Finishing Transport Module 2 Open lever 3 to the left 1 and turn the knob clockwise 2 Remove jammed paper 1 2 1 2 ...

Page 899: ... its original position 4 Close the Cover When the Lamp 4 is Lit 1 Open the cover of the Finishing Transport Module 2 Open lever 4 downward 1 and turn the knob clockwise 2 Remove jammed paper 3 Return lever 4 to its original position 4 Close the Cover 1 2 ...

Page 900: ...Narrow Glass Strip 901 Note A remedy differs depending on where the document jam occurs Follow the instructions displayed and remove the jammed paper Document Jams at the Covers 1 Pull up to open the document feeder top cover until it stops Note When you fully open the cover it enters a fixed position Open the cover gently 2 Open the document feeder left cover until it stops 3 If the document is n...

Page 901: ...r tray 10 Make sure that the document is not torn wrinkled or folded and load the document again following the instructions displayed on the touch screen Note After removing the jammed document reload the entire document including the pages already scanned The machine will automatically skip the scanned pages and start scanning unscanned pages Torn wrinkled or folded documents may cause document j...

Page 902: ...is not torn wrinkled or folded and load the document again following the instructions displayed on the touch screen Note Torn wrinkled or folded documents may cause document jams and damage To scan such documents Torn wrinkled or folded documents may cause document jams and damage To scan such documents directly place the document on the document glass to make copies ...

Page 903: ...ures below contact our Customer Support Center Important Depending on the type of paper that is being stapled the stapled nails may be bent If the bent nails are stuck inside the machine they may eventually cause paper jams Remove the bent staple when opening the staple cartridge cover If you do not remove the bent staple a staple jam may occur as a result Open the staple cartridge cover only when...

Page 904: ...am occurred in the staple cartridge of the C3 Finisher optional and the C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker optional The following describes how to clear paper jams in the C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker as an example The procedure is the same as for the C3 Finisher 1 Make sure that the machine has stopped and open the finisher front door 2 With grasping the lever R1 of the staple cartridge holder pull ...

Page 905: ... door Note If the finisher front door is not completely closed a message will appear and the machine remains paused If you cannot remove jammed staples even after you perform the above procedure contact our Customer Support Center When the Finisher D4 Finisher D4 with Booklet or Finisher D5 is installed The following describes how to clear staple jams in the Finisher D4 with Booklet as an example ...

Page 906: ...ng staples 4 Open the cover of the unit as shown in the figure and remove the jammed staples 5 Push the removed staple cartridge back to its original position 6 Close the finisher right door Note A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the finisher right door is even slightly open If the staples cannot be removed after carrying out the above procedures contact our Customer ...

Page 907: ...Finisher with Booklet Maker is installed The following describes how to clear staple jam occurred in the booklet staple cartridge of the C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker optional 1 Make sure that the machine is not operating and open the finisher front door 2 Pull out the booklet unit 3 With grasping the lever of the booklet staple cartridge push the booklet staple cartridge downward Then pull out t...

Page 908: ...ple cartridge is fitted in of the booklet unit 8 Return the booklet unit to its original position 9 Close the finisher front door Note If the door is not closed completely a message appears and the machine will remain paused If you cannot remove jammed staples even after you perform the above procedure contact our Customer Support Center When the Finisher D4 with Booklet is installed The following...

Page 909: ...finisher right door 2 Press the levers R2 and R3 to the right 1 and pull out the unit 2 3 Hold the tabs of the staple cartridge and then lift to remove it 4 Pull out the cartridge 5 Remove the jammed staples as shown in the figure Levers R2 and R3 CAUTION Be careful in removing jammed staples ...

Page 910: ...d gently push it until it clicks into place 7 Return the unit to its original position 8 Close the finisher right door Note A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the finisher right door is even slightly open If the staples cannot be removed after carrying out the above procedures contact our Customer Support Center ...

Page 911: ...isher D5 is installed Note The procedure is the same as when the staple cartridge is removed from the unit 1 Open the cover of the unit as shown in the figure and remove the jammed staple 2 See a lever on the rear side of the unit 3 Move the lever in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure Important Be careful when removing jammed staples to avoid hurting your fingers and nails 4 Turn the u...

Page 912: ...Important Be careful when removing jammed staples to avoid hurting your fingers 6 Push the staple cartridge in the unit 7 Return the unit to its original position 8 Close the finisher right door Note A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the finisher right door is even slightly open ...

Page 913: ...curl button is pressed Pressing the Clear All button on the control panel cannot change the curling correction mode The machine comes equipped with the Paper Curl Adjustment feature allowing you to register Paper Curl Adjustment types on the control panel then assign them to a custom paper or a paper tray The Paper Curl Adjustment feature can be used in conjunction with the hardware buttons descri...

Page 914: ...correction depending on the sizes and orientations of documents The button should be set to Auto in most situations The button automatically switches to the Auto mode when z the machine is switched on z the machine exits the Power Saver mode Upward Curling ON Performs upward curl correction on all paper If your output is curled upward press this button to prevent upward curls Downward Curling ON P...

Page 915: ...u press the AUTO button Curling is corrected automatically when this indicator is lit These indicators light up during upward curl correction The degree of upward correction is indicated by the lit position with the top being the strongest This indicator lights up when the Manual button is pressed during Auto mode Curl correction is not active while this button is lit These indicators light up dur...

Page 916: ...22 Problem Solving 916 Problem Solving 22 ...

Page 917: ...printer emulation languages z Specifications 918 z Printable Area 928 z Internal Fonts 929 z Optional Components 931 z ESC P K Emulation 933 z PDF Direct Print 948 z DocuWorks Direct Print 950 z PCL Emulation 952 z HP GL 2 Emulation 959 z Passcode Setting for Extended Functions 978 z Notes and Restrictions 981 ...

Page 918: ...inting with long length paper of 52 220 gsm is available The continuous print speed becomes slower Some paper trays and output trays do not support long length paper Important Image loss width lead edge 4 mm trail edge 2 mm left and right edges 2 mm For Multi model Print Driver 2 the non standard size available for Trays 1 3 and Tray 5 is 148 x 210 mm 297 x 432 mm Output Paper Weight Tray 1 3 64 2...

Page 919: ...AIN Store to print server TWAIN Scanning Resolution 600 600 dpi Printing Resolution 2 400 2 400 dpi multicolored photo 600 600 dpi text text photo photo maps Halftone Printable Colors 256 color graduation for each color 16 700 000 colors Output Paper Size Standard Size Maximum A3 Minimum Postcard Non standard Size 98 148 mm 330 488 mm Important Image loss width lead edge 4 mm trail edge 2 mm left ...

Page 920: ...eets or more Z fold stack 30 sheets or more A3 11 x 17 Finisher tray stapled A4 200 sets 1 staple 100 sets 2 4 staples or 3 000 sheets B4 or larger 100 sets or 1 500 sheets Mixed stack 70 sets or 200 sheets or more Z fold stack 30 sheets or more A3 11 x 17 Larger size paper is stacked on top of smaller size paper Important When using FX P paper Staple Capability 50 sheets 90 gsm or less Paper Size...

Page 921: ...Z fold stack 30 sheets or more A3 11 x 17 Booklet tray 20 sets 2 3 1 Larger size paper is stacked on top of smaller size paper 2 Paper of the same size 3 For 16 or more sheets set up to 15 sets Important When using FX P paper Staple Capability 50 sheets 90 gsm or less Paper Size Maximum A3 11 x 17 Minimum B5 Position 1 place angled front back parallel back 2 4 places parallel Punch Number of Holes...

Page 922: ...B4 or larger 1 500 sheets Mix stack 350 sheets When using FX P Paper Important When larger size papers are loaded on smaller size papers Finisher Tray with staple A4 Finisher D4 200 sets or 3 000 sheets Finisher D5 200 sets or 2 000 sheets B4 or larger 100 sets or 1 500 sheets Staple Capacity 100 sheets Important When using FX P Paper 65 sheets when using paper larger than A4 8 5 11 Staples may be...

Page 923: ...epth 727 Height 1 165 mm When D4 D5 Folder Unit is installed Width 1 250 Depth 727 Height 1 165 mm Weight Finisher D4 115 kg When D4 D5 Folder Unit is installed 155 kg Finisher D5 120 kg When D4 D5 Folder Unit is installed 160 kg Type Output Tray Collate Stack Finisher Tray Collate Stack offset stacking available Booklet Tray Collate Stack Paper Size Output Tray Standard size Maximum A3 11 x 17 Mi...

Page 924: ...1 Staples may be bent depending on the deployment conditions such as Paper Weight Paper Size Standard Size Maximum A3 11 17 Minimum B5 Position 1 place Front Angled stapling Center Parallel stapling Rear Parallel stapling Angled stapling A3 and A4 only 2 places Parallel stapling 4 places Parallel stapling Punch Number of Holes 2 or 4 3 optional Paper Size Maximum A3 11 17 Minimum B5 2 holes A4 8 5...

Page 925: ... 10 2 03 A 0 85 A with Folder Unit for both 50 60 Hz 3 Maximum Power Consumption 203 W or less with Folder Unit Dimensions Width 1 055 Depth 727 Height 1 165 mm When Folder Unit is installed Width 1 255 Depth 727 Height 1 165 mm Weight 150 kg When Folder Unit is installed 190 kg Paper Size z Standard Size Maximum A4 Letter Minimum B5 Paper Weight 64 220 gsm Note It is recommended to use papers rec...

Page 926: ...n 148 X direction mm 330 Y direction 488 X direction mm Note The Post Card Kit is required to load postcards or non standard size paper whose length is 98 181 mm Y direction Paper Weight 52 350 gsm Note It is recommended to use papers recommended by Fuji Xerox For using paper manufactured other than by Fuji Xerox contact our Customer Support Center Paper Capacity Number of Trays 2 100 sheets 2 tra...

Page 927: ...m Weight 155kg Paper Size Standard size Maximum A3 13 x 18 Minimum A4 8 5 x 11 Non standard size Maximum 330 x 457 mm Minimum 210 x 279 mm Paper Weight 60 300 gsm Capacity Center binding 20 sheets Center folding 5 sheets Note Square back binding is not supported for center folding or center binding of less than 5 sheets Trimming Size 2 20 mm Booklet Tray Capacity 20 sets folding 15 sheets or less ...

Page 928: ...can be extended to 323 0 1 482 0 2 mm and the print assured area can be extended to 317 0 482 0 mm at a maximum For copying both the printable area and the print assured area can be extended to 293 0 426 0 mm at a maximum The un printable area however may vary depending on the size of paper 1 326mm when the HCF B1 S or the High Capacity Feeder C3 DS is used and the tray position is adjusted 2 For ...

Page 929: ...n ESC P K Arial Arial Italic Arial Bold Arial Bold Italic Courier Courier Italic Courier Bold Courier Bold Italic Roman Sans Serif Symbol Times New Roman Times New Roman Bold Times New Roman Italic Times New Roman Bold Italic ITC Zapf Dingbats GoldSEMM GoldSAMM PDF Arial Arial Italic Arial Bold Arial Bold Italic Courier Courier Italic Courier Bold Courier Bold Italic Symbol Times New Roman Times N...

Page 930: ...lic Times New Bold Times New Bold Italic Symbol Wingdings Line Printer Times Roman Times Italic Times Bold Times Bold Italic Helvetica Helvetica Oblique Helvetica Bold Helvetica Bold Oblique CourierPS CourierPS Oblique CourierPS Bold CourierPS Bold Oblique SymbolPS Palatino Roman Palatino Italic Palatino Bold Palatino Bold Italic ITC Bookman Light ITC Bookman Light Italic ITC Bookman Demi ITC Book...

Page 931: ...aples or hole punches output It also folds output in half or staples folded output Inserter is installed for loading paper to be used as separators and covers to bind booklets Finishing Transport Module Connects a 3rd vendor finisher to the Finisher D5 D4 D5 Folder Unit Used to fold sheets in Z folded or C folded form Note This is available only when the Finisher D4 the Finisher D4 with Booklet or...

Page 932: ...t from a computer will be temporarily stored in the machine Even if the machine is busy you can call and execute the job on another machine on the network No server is required to store the jobs Network Accounting Kit Allows you to keep track of user accounts via an external authentication server Gigabit Ethernet Board Allows you to connect 1000 BASE T Ethernet Secondary Ethernet Kit Adds an Ether...

Page 933: ...e emulation mode and the printer to be emulated are as follows Host Interfaces and Emulation Different host interfaces support different printer languages The host interfaces that support printer languages are as follows z USB port z LPD port z IPP port z Port9100 port z WSD port Note WSD stands for Web Services on Devices Switching between Printer Languages The machine provides the Multi emulatio...

Page 934: ...ot be shared among different printer languages Font Caching To ensure hi speed printing outline fonts of up to a certain size are cached Outline fonts are converted into bitmap data temporarily and then printed To minimize this processing time the processed bitmap data is saved in the memory This process is called font caching The saved bitmap data is deleted when you turn the machine off or reset...

Page 935: ...s The barcodes that can be used are as follows z EAN 13 z EAN 8 z Interleaved 2 of 5 z UPC A z UPC E z CODE39 z CODE128 z POSTNET Forms You can use ESC P K to register forms on the machine Up to 64 forms can be registered For more information on registering forms contact our Customer Support Center ESC P K Emulation Settings The following tables show the basic and extended settings that can be con...

Page 936: ...1 102 Continuous form paper 15 x 12 103 Continuous form paper 15 x 11 3 A3 4 A4 5 A5 14 B4 15 B5 21 8 5 x 14 22 8 5 x 13 23 8 5 x 11 24 11 x 17 0 Postcard The number of characters printed is 80 characters 72 rows for continuous form paper 10 x 12 80 characters 66 rows for continuous form paper 10 x 11 136 characters 72 rows for continuous form paper 15 x 12 and 136 characters 66 rows for continuou...

Page 937: ...lates the magnification based on a combination of Original Size and 1 2 of Paper Size Setting Item Item Number Value Setting Item Item Number Value Paper position 20 Sets the paper position 0 Default Without cut sheet feeder left 1 With cut sheet feeder center Note When Without cut sheet feeder left is specified and FF line feed command is received the machine skips the number of lines specified i...

Page 938: ...utside of the printable area to fit onto the printable area of the output paper 17 Variable vertical magnification Sets the magnification for the vertical or horizontal direction 45 to 210 Default 100 45 210 Note When a continuous form paper is selected for Original Size print result is identical for Preset and Fit to Cut Sheet 18 Variable horizontal magnification 2 Up mode 21 Sets whether to prin...

Page 939: ... the character print area 53 Image enhancement Sets whether or not to enable the Image Enhancement feature Image Enhancement smoothens the border between black and white reducing rough edges and thus seemingly increasing the resolution 0 Off 1 Default On ESCP switch 55 Text quality Sets the Text Quality mode to high quality or draft 0 Default High Quality 1 Draft Important Since the default value ...

Page 940: ...e escape sequence replacement feature When enabling specify the escape sequence with item 63 0 Default Disabled 1 Enabled For more information on extended commands contact our Customer Support Center 63 Escape sequence character To control an extended command with a text code you must specify an escape sequence the first two bytes of the extended command Enter two characters using the keyboard dis...

Page 941: ...Setting Item Item Number Value Document Size Paper Size A3 A4 A5 B4 B5 11 x 17 8 5 x 14 8 5 x 13 8 5 x 11 Postcard A3 Long edge 100 70 49 86 60 103 84 78 66 100 Short edge 100 70 48 86 60 94 72 72 72 100 A4 Long edge 143 100 70 123 86 147 120 112 94 48 Short edge 143 100 69 123 86 135 103 103 103 45 A5 Long edge 204 143 100 177 123 210 172 160 135 69 Short edge 207 145 100 178 124 195 149 149 149 ...

Page 942: ...Short edge 139 97 67 120 84 131 100 100 100 100 Postcard Long edge 100 100 145 100 178 100 100 100 100 100 Short edge 100 100 153 100 190 100 100 100 100 100 15 x 11 Long edge 119 83 58 103 72 122 100 93 78 100 Short edge 103 72 50 89 62 97 74 74 74 100 15 x 12 Long edge 119 83 58 103 72 122 100 93 78 100 Short edge 95 66 46 81 57 89 68 68 68 100 10 x 11 Long edge 147 103 72 127 89 151 124 115 97 ...

Page 943: ... 83 83 100 Short edge 116 80 55 100 69 120 98 90 76 100 11 x 17 Long edge 68 48 100 59 100 64 49 49 49 100 Short edge 74 51 100 64 100 77 62 58 48 100 8 5 x 14 Long edge 83 58 100 72 50 78 60 60 60 100 Short edge 97 67 100 84 57 100 82 75 63 100 8 5 x 13 Long edge 90 63 100 77 54 84 64 64 64 100 Short edge 97 67 100 84 57 100 82 75 63 100 8 5 x 11 Long edge 106 74 51 92 64 100 77 77 77 100 Short e...

Page 944: ... 76 136 95 149 114 114 114 50 11 x 17 Long edge 95 67 47 82 57 98 80 74 63 100 Short edge 103 72 50 89 62 97 74 74 74 100 8 5 x 14 Long edge 116 81 57 100 70 119 98 90 76 100 Short edge 133 93 64 115 80 125 96 96 96 100 8 5 x 13 Long edge 125 87 61 108 75 128 105 97 82 100 Short edge 133 93 64 115 80 125 96 96 96 100 8 5 x 11 Long edge 147 103 72 127 89 151 124 115 97 100 Short edge 133 93 64 115 ...

Page 945: ... 97 67 105 81 81 81 100 Short edge 110 76 53 95 65 114 93 86 72 100 11 x 17 Long edge 67 47 100 57 100 63 48 48 48 100 Short edge 72 50 100 62 100 74 60 56 47 100 8 5 x 14 Long edge 81 47 100 70 49 76 58 58 58 100 Short edge 93 50 100 80 55 96 78 72 61 100 8 5 x 13 Long edge 87 61 100 75 52 82 63 63 63 100 Short edge 93 64 100 80 55 96 78 72 61 100 8 5 x 11 Long edge 103 89 100 89 72 97 74 74 74 1...

Page 946: ... on your hardware configuration Paper Size Portrait Landscape Characters Lines Characters Lines A3 113 92 161 63 B4 97 78 139 53 A4 79 63 113 42 B5 68 53 97 35 A5 54 42 79 27 Postcard 35 30 54 19 11 x 17 106 94 166 58 8 5 x 14 81 76 136 43 8 5 x 13 81 70 126 43 8 5 x 11 81 58 106 43 Paper Size Portrait Landscape Characters Lines Characters Lines A3 113 95 161 66 B4 97 82 139 56 A4 79 66 113 45 B5 ...

Page 947: ...cter pitch and 6 lpi line pitch 10 inch Continuous Form Mode Paper Size Portrait Landscape Characters Lines Characters Lines A3 116 99 165 70 B4 101 85 143 60 A4 82 70 116 49 B5 71 60 101 42 A5 58 49 82 34 Postcard 39 34 58 23 11 x 17 110 102 170 66 8 5 x 14 85 84 140 51 8 5 x 13 85 78 130 51 8 5 x 11 85 66 110 51 Paper Size Portrait Landscape Characters Lines Characters Lines All supported paper ...

Page 948: ...red here are valid when printing PDF files without using ContentsBridge provided by Fuji Xerox z Output Quantity z Layout z 2 Sided Printing z Paper Size z Print Mode z Output Color z Collate z Process Mode Setting Item Item Number Value Output quantity 401 Sets the number of copies to be printed 1 999 Default 1 1 999 sheets 2 sided printing 402 Sets the 2 sided printing option 0 Default 1 Sided 1...

Page 949: ...g prints two pages onto one sheet of paper When 2 Up is selected the paper size is fixed at A4 The 4 up setting prints four pages on each sheet of paper When 4 Up is selected the paper size is fixed at A4 Paper size 406 Sets the size of the paper to be printed 0 Default Auto 1 A4 The Auto setting automatically determines the paper size based on the size and settings of a PDF file to be printed Out...

Page 950: ... Direct Print feature The settings configured here are valid when printing DocuWorks files without using ContentsBridge provided by Fuji Xerox z Output Quantity z Layout z 2 Sided Printing z Paper Size z Print Mode z Output Color z Collate Setting Item Item Number Value Output quantity 501 Sets the number of copies to be printed 1 999 Default 1 1 999 sheets 2 sided printing 502 Sets the 2 sided pr...

Page 951: ... the paper size is fixed at A4 Paper size 506 Sets the size of the paper to be printed 0 Default Auto 1 A4 The Auto setting automatically determines the paper size based on the size and settings of a DocuWorks file to be printed Output color 507 Sets whether to print in color or monochrome 0 Default Auto 1 Black The Auto setting automatically determines the output color color or monochrome for eac...

Page 952: ...e emulation mode and the printer to be emulated are as follows Switching between Printer Languages The machine provides the Multi emulation feature that allows switching between different printer languages The methods of switching between printer languages are as follows Switching by Commands Commands for switching between printer languages are provided Upon receipt of a command the machine switch...

Page 953: ...z Courier z CourierPS z Courier Italic z CourierPS Oblique z Courier Bold z CourierPS Bold z Courier Bold Italic z CourierPS Bold Oblique z Letter Gothic z SymbolPS z Letter Gothic Italic z Palatino Roman z Letter Gothic Bold z Palatino Italic z Albertus Medium z Palatino Bold z Albertus Extra Bold z Palatino Bold Italic z Clarendon Condensed z ITC Bookman Light z Coronet z ITC Bookman Light Itali...

Page 954: ... by the machine refer to Printing Pending Jobs P 380 Forcible Output in Emulation Mode In emulation mode data is not output until one complete page of data is prepared For a USB interface if printing ends in the middle of a page the next data set waits until the time set with Auto Eject Time elapses In this case the Forcible Printing feature does not wait for the auto eject time however forcibly p...

Page 955: ... set to Auto Only cut sheet can be set 3 A3 4 Default A4 5 A5 14 B4 15 B5 21 8 5 14 22 8 5 13 23 Default 8 5 11 24 11 17 25 Custom Size 30 8K Important When Trays 1 to 3 or Tray 6 or Tray 7 is selected Paper Size cannot be set The paper size loaded in the specified tray is displayed Note When Trays 1 to 3 or Tray 6 or Tray 7 is selected the paper size is determined by the size of paper loaded in t...

Page 956: ...rigold 35 Arial 36 Arial Italic 37 Arial Bold 38 Arial Bold Italic 39 Times New 40 Times New Italic 41 Times New Bold 42 Times New Bold Italic 43 Symbol 44 Wingdings 45 Line Printer 46 Times Roman 47 Times Italic 48 Times Bold 49 Times Bold Italic 50 Helvetica 51 Helvetica Oblique 52 Helvetica Bold 53 Helvetica Bold Oblique 54 CourierPS 55 CourierPS Oblique 56 CourierPS Bold 57 CourierPS Bold Obli...

Page 957: ... 2400 Default 1000 6 00 to 24 00 point Form line 211 Specifies the number of lines on a page 5 128 Default 64 6 00 to 24 00 point Quantity 212 Sets the number of copies to be printed 1 999 Default 1 1 to 999 sets Important When the output quantity is specified by a client that number of copies is printed After printing the number set on the control panel is overwritten with the number newly specif...

Page 958: ...fault LEF 1 SEF Line termination 218 Sets line termination processing 0 Default Off 1 Add LF Appends an LF to CR 2 Add CR Appends a CR to LF and FF 3 CR XX Appends a CR to LF and FF and LF to CR Default custom paper size 219 Short edge Specifies the default custom paper size 2100 Default short edge value 210 0 mm 2970 Default long edge value 297 0 mm 0 9999 0 to 999 9 mm 220 Long edge Print Quanti...

Page 959: ...ows Switching between Printer Languages The machine provides the Multi emulation feature that allows switching between different printer languages The methods of switching between printer languages are as follows Switching by Commands Commands for switching between printer languages are provided Upon receipt of a command the machine switches to the relevant printer language Automatic Switching The...

Page 960: ...already received by the machine refer to Printing Pending Jobs P 380 Forcible Output in Emulation Mode In emulation mode data is not output until one complete page of data is prepared For a USB interface if printing ends in the middle of a page the next data set waits until the time set with Auto Eject Time elapses In this case the Forcible Printing feature does not wait for the auto eject time ho...

Page 961: ...k on the printer when using Auto Layout feature Paper Margin The paper size is set to A series paper by factory default If the print data is larger than the active coordinates area the machine prints the data on the next larger A series paper for example the next larger size of A4 is A3 When you set the paper margins however the active coordinates area is determined by subtracting the area set in ...

Page 962: ... Paper size 102 Sets the default paper size Only available when Paper tray is set to Auto or Tray 5 Only cut sheet can be set 3 A3 4 Default A4 5 A5 14 B4 15 B5 99 Auto 101 Default A Size Important When Trays 1 to 3 Tray 6 or Tray 7 is selected Paper size cannot be set The paper size loaded in the specified tray is displayed Note If A Size or Auto is selected the settings become as follows When Do...

Page 963: ...ientation is prioritized Coordinate rotation 104 Sets the paper orientation for printing 0 Default 0 degree 1 90 degree Color mode 105 Sets the color mode 0 Color 1 Default Grayscale 2 Black pen Parameter Item No Value Parameter Item No Value Auto layout 106 Selects whether to perform auto layout of the document or not 0 Default ON 1 OFF Active palette 107 Selects whether to use a pen specified by...

Page 964: ... 2 command that does not include BP command select HP GL 2 151 Hard clip Sets the size of hard clip area In HP GL mode the plottable area is determined in line with the paper size apart from the printable area This area is called the hard clip area and determines the maximum range of pen movement Accordingly images cannot be drawn outside the boundary of the hard clip area 0 Standard 2 Default Pap...

Page 965: ...g is being used 0 Default Auto 1 PS 2 IW 3 IP 4 Adapted Note The setting of the active area determination command is valid when Document size is set to Auto 162 Paper margin Sets the paper margin when auto scaling is being used 0 99 Default 0 0 to 99 mm Note The setting of the paper margin is valid when Document size is set to Auto 163 Image enhancement Sets whether to perform image enhancement wh...

Page 966: ...width thickness of the line of the 16 pens No 00 to 15 You can set the width from 0 0 to 25 5 mm in 0 1 mm increments No 00 denotes Item No 800 0 255 Default 3 0 to 25 5 mm Note If the image is reduced by concern with the relationship between Document size and Paper size settings the pen width is reduced accordingly to 0 1 mm at the smallest The width of the line gets thick symmetrically with resp...

Page 967: ... denotes Item No 900 0 Default None 1 Intersect 2 Round 3 Cut None Intersect Round Cut Note None is suitable for drafts because it takes shortest processing time If a symbol is set by symbol command the link process is not executed The symbol command is an HP GL 2 command for specifying a symbol 950 965 Pen density No 0 No 15 Sets the density of the 16 pens No 00 to 15 You can set the density from...

Page 968: ... Note The HP GL emulation supports five paper sizes A3 A5 A4 B4 and B5 Paper size Paper Length 1 7200 inch Coordinate Value 1 7200 inch X Axis Y Axis Margin Printable Area Top right Edge Margin Width Height Bottom left X Bottom left Y Long Side Short Side Top right X Top right Y XR YU A3 119052 84168 1260 1260 116532 81648 117792 82908 1260 1260 A4 84168 59508 1260 1260 81648 56988 82908 58248 126...

Page 969: ...1260 81648 116532 82908 117792 1260 1260 A4 59508 84168 1260 1260 56988 81648 58248 82908 1260 1260 A5 41940 59508 1260 1260 39420 56988 40680 58248 1260 1260 B4 72828 103176 1260 1260 70308 100656 71568 101916 1260 1260 B5 51588 72828 1260 1260 49068 70308 50328 71568 1260 1260 Short side YU Long side Bottom left X Bottom left Y 0 0 XR Height Printable Area Top right X Top right Y Width Physical ...

Page 970: ...od for obtaining the active coordinate area using the area determination mode The default value is Auto 0 z Set the paper margin using Paper margin 162 The default value is 0 mm 0 z Set the scaling mode The default value is Paper Size 0 Setting Item Details The following describes the details for each setting You can change the settings on the HP GL 2 Programming screen Document Size To set Docume...

Page 971: ...ive coordinates area If there are no PS commands in the data the active coordinate area is determined by Adapted Paper Margin Set the range from 0 to 99 mm The default value is 0 mm To get the active coordinates area subtract the area set in paper margins from the active coordinates area obtained in the area determination mode Scaling Mode Select the mode for determining the document size from the...

Page 972: ...m size that includes the active coordinates area obtained in step 3 will be the document size If the Scaling Mode is the ACA 1 Obtain the coordinate area to be active from the HP GL data entered in accord with the area determination mode 2 As a margin add the larger value of either the font size specified in the page the default size or one half the specified pen width to the active coordinates ar...

Page 973: ...sible paper size If A series paper A3 A4 A5 is not loaded in the trays all three sizes A3 A4 and A5 become possible sizes a message is displayed on the touch screen prompting the user to load A series paper If the Paper Size Setting is Auto The paper sizes among the five sizes A3 B4 A4 B5 and A5 that are actually loaded in the trays become the possible paper size If A3 B4 A4 B5 or A5 paper is not ...

Page 974: ...osition is bottom left or center the origin of the document and the paper are aligned and drawn If the Document Size is Auto and the Scaling Mode is ACA The hard clip setting is inactive The hard clip area is always the advanced hard clip area The scaling factor is determined according to the ACA and the paper size The range for the ACA for each paper size is as follows The maximum scaling factor ...

Page 975: ...e of auto layout memory is set to 100kbyte and an error will occur on the printer when the print data exceeds 100kbyte In this case change the size of auto layout memory using the control panel Auto layout memory size can be set up to 5120kbyte The printer cannot receive the print data exceeding 5120kbyte We recommend you to install hard disk on the printer when using Auto Layout feature Examples ...

Page 976: ...cument Auto Coordinate Origin 0 Degrees Scaling Mode Paper Size Scaling OFF Document Auto Coordinate Origin 0 Degrees Scaling Mode Active Coordinate Area Scaling ON Print Area Document Size Paper Size Print Area Document Size Paper Size Print Area Active Coordinate Area determined by entered data Paper Size ...

Page 977: ...HP GL 2 Emulation 977 Appendix 23 Document Auto Coordinate Origin 0 Degrees Scaling Mode Active Coordinate Area Scaling OFF Print Area Active Coordinate Area determined by entered data Paper Size ...

Page 978: ...n on the control panel 2 Enter the System Administrator s user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed on the screen and select Enter Note When a passcode is required select Next and enter the System Administrator s passcode 3 Select Tools on the Services Home screen Note The screen may differ depending on the model 4 Select Maintenance in Common Service Settings under System Settings...

Page 979: ...ng the machine If you are setting Embedded Plug ins continue the steps below 8 After rebooting the machine start CentreWare Internet Services Note For information on how to start CentreWare Internet Services refer to CentreWare Internet Services Settings P 555 9 Select Embedded Plug ins in Plug in Custom Services Settings under Security from Properties tab 10 Check the Enabled checkbox and click A...

Page 980: ...23 Appendix 980 Appendix 23 11 Click Reboot Machine After rebooting the machine the setting will be enabled ...

Page 981: ...puter or read processing of data in a medium such as a USB memory device if characters that the machine does not support are included in folder and file names these characters may not be displayed correctly When the Media Print Photos service is used only ASCII characters can be used Output Destination When you change the finisher to install reconfigure the output destination under Tools System Se...

Page 982: ...side the machine and the time at which the job is actually printed may not be coincident with one another depending on the machine status and settings or the content of the print job The time printed in Force Annotation is the time at which the print job is started inside the machine Stored Programming z The following features and operations cannot be registered on a stored program Registration an...

Page 983: ...ocument immediately after the machine exits the mode the detection error of a document size may occur In this case enter the document size manually It takes a few seconds before the machine can detect a document size automatically This detection error will not occur if you load a document close the document cover and wait for a few seconds before start scanning a document Large Size UI Kit z By fa...

Page 984: ...its the Power Saver mode while each cover or a paper tray is open z After the machine exits the Power Saver mode the value detected before the machine enters the Power Saver mode is displayed or informed as paper tray status and the information on the consumables such as the toner remaining amount status of the drum cartridge and paper if the service used for the output device is not activated z A...

Page 985: ...n that case the settings specified in either service are cleared ID Card Copy z The machine does not shift the ID card image to the center of the output in any magnification ratio and image size you specified z When the reduced size is specified to copy an ID card the machine may copy the ID card in a different orientation from the original orientation depending on the magnification ratio specifie...

Page 986: ...de when 2 sided printing is specified z A job was terminated If data cannot be written to the print page buffer the job including that page is terminated Printing from a USB Memory Device z To print from a USB memory device the USB Memory Kit optional is required z You can use a USB host adapter to print from your USB memory device or via your USB cable as necessary but the operation is not guaran...

Page 987: ...terminated the connection requests in the queue will be processed subsequently when the total number of the connections becomes less than four z Functions to control jobs such as canceling or suspending jobs are not provided Instead you can cancel a job on the Job Status screen from the control panel or from CentreWare Internet Services z The machine prints jobs in the order in which they are spoo...

Page 988: ... CentreWare Internet Services the files are not deleted regardless of the setting of Delete Files After Retrieval Using Network Scan Driver and Stored File Manager 3 Simultaneously You cannot use both the Network Scan Driver and Stored File Manager 3 on a single computer to connect to the machine A maximum of three computers using either the Network Scan Driver or Stored File Manager 3 may retriev...

Page 989: ...creen Switching After Inserting a USB memory device z If a USB memory device is inserted when the machine is switched off and then you switch on the Services Home screen is displayed z When a USB memory device is inserted into the USB memory slot during the Power Saver mode the touch screen does not light up After exiting the Power Saver mode by pressing the Power Saver button insert the USB memor...

Page 990: ...ertificate revocation setting in the viewer Digital Signature of PDF z The security handler XERX FX PPKMS of Xerox is not provided z When a PDF document signed by the machine is displayed with Adobe Acrobat Reader a message stating that no handler is found for signature confirmation may be displayed In this case select Windows Digital Certificate or Adobe Default Security z A certificate to be use...

Page 991: ...olor Scanning is set to Color when Resolution is set to 200 dpi or 300 dpi and when File Format is set to PDF or DocuWorks z You cannot change the number of colors The maximum is 16 colors z You can attach thumbnails to files when the Specific Color is selected but the thumbnails are displayed in full color z Monochrome images scanned with the Specific Color feature may be different from the ordin...

Page 992: ...ternet Services but cannot switch the mode per job or per destination FTP server z Depending on your network environment operations may not be performed properly unless the FTP transfer mode is switched from Passive Mode to Active Mode z When IP Filtering is enabled make sure to switch the FTP transfer mode to Active Mode In Passive Mode the server permits a client to connect to the port for the d...

Page 993: ...ce Format z This feature supports Microsoft Word format doc and Microsoft Excel format xls z An optional component is required to use this feature For more information contact our Customer Support Center z This feature provides the convenience for users who want to directly edit texts or images on the scanned document converted in the Microsoft Office format Note that the strict reproducibility of...

Page 994: ...tion disclosed over the network Setting the System Environment for E mail Service To send or receive e mail the system environment of the machine must be set for the E mail service Set up the system environment such as SMTP POP3 and DNS servers as required Notes on Security E mail uses the Internet which is a network connecting computers worldwide as its transmission path Thus since other signals ...

Page 995: ...the same way as described above The meter on the Billing Information screen calculates the number of printed pages correctly regardless of the Pages per Side setting Notes and Restrictions when Connecting with Internet Service Provider This section describes notes and restrictions to observe when using features that transmit e mails using an Internet service provider ISP The features related to e ...

Page 996: ...you are using When access is restricted by MAC address registration on the DHCP server may be required Settings from the Control Panel Before you use the E mail service set the maximum data size for sending e mail on the control panel For more information on the maximum limit refer to the ISP guidelines The recommended value is 1 to 2 MB In the System Administration mode select Tools System Settin...

Page 997: ...orne by you Set Polling Interval to at least 10 minutes when connecting to ISP Notes and Restrictions on the Interrupt Mode If you press the Interrupt button while printing the machine temporarily stops printing and enters the Interrupt mode Important When Resume by User in Resume Job After Print Error P 495 is selected the machine will not temporarily stop printing even when the Interrupt button ...

Page 998: ...e encrypted or with signature attached cannot be retrieved from CentreWare Internet Services z When you retrieve a file in PDF format from CentreWare Internet Services the PDF file cannot be optimized for Web view Job Job Instruction from the Control Panel 1 Job Execution Copy Required O Print Printing of a document 2 instructed from a client computer Required 3 O Printing of a document 4 instruct...

Page 999: ...ions Microsoft Windows Vista x64 Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2008 x64 Editions Microsoft Windows 7 x64 Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 x64 Editions Microsoft Windows 8 x64 Edition Microsoft Windows 8 1 x64 Edition and Microsoft Windows Server 2012 x64 Editions and Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2 x64 Edition Drivers For notes and restrictions on the supported operating systems refer ...

Page 1000: ...z If a Job Flow is performed with the following settings an interference pattern may be created Original Type Photo Text or Photo Resolution 400 dpi or 600 dpi z If an interference pattern is created change the settings as follows Resolution 200 dpi or 300 dpi Web Application feature z The following conditions and restrictions are applied when you print files stored in a remote server Output Desti...

Page 1001: ...pply to the ordinary print jobs This feature is applicable to the jobs stored in the machine and then printed by the instruction from the touch screen such as Copy Secure Print Private Charge Print Print Stored File Media Print Text and Media Print Photos Notes and Restrictions on the Authentication and Accounting Features Login to Remote Accounts z When you perform print using Kerberos Server try...

Page 1002: ...guration on the Machine z IP addresses are managed for the entire system Configure the settings only after consulting your network administrator z The setting of subnet mask and gateway addresses may be required depending on the network environment Consult your network administrator and configure the required settings z When the port status is set to Enabled it may automatically switch to Disabled...

Page 1003: ...a transmission from the computer z When Receiving Buffer LPD is set to No Spooling When the machine receives a print request from a computer the machine cannot accept print requests from any other computers z When a computer s IP address or a computer name is changed When you change a computer s IP address or a computer name queries and cancel processes submitted from the machine are no longer exe...

Page 1004: ...scovery z Some features of SMB are not supported If you attempt to use services with a NetBIOS name communication may not be available in some environment z IPv6 in IPv4 tunneling in the machine itself is not supported Important If IP Mode is set to IPv6 Mode the IPv6 inIPv4 tunneling cannot be performed z If more than one router exist in the same subnet a communication error may occur z In a dual...

Page 1005: ... In the following cases since the addresses may not be recognized as those of the same machine the lpq command for status check and the lprm command for canceling may not be available for LPD print jobs When simultaneously operating IPv4 and IPv6 addresses with the same host When simultaneously operating multiple IPv6 addresses with the same host z IPv6 addresses may not be correctly recorded on j...

Page 1006: ... Service Settings Paper Tray Settings Auto Tray Switching Control Auto Tray Switching in the System Administration mode When the machine does not print with custom paper When the paper selection setting is set to Auto for printing any custom paper is not available To print using a custom paper specify its tray on the print driver Notes and Restrictions for Print E mail Print E mail The machine can...

Page 1007: ...ocate Memory 492 Allow Casual Users to Edit From Field 508 Allow Guest Users to Edit Field 508 Allow to edit From if Search Found 508 Allow User to Disable Active Settings 552 Allows to edit From if Search Failed 508 Alternative Name for Account ID 542 Alternative Name for User ID 541 547 Annotation Create Comments 467 Annotations 184 462 Annotations Comment Density 466 Apply Layout Template to Co...

Page 1008: ...les in a folder 307 Clean Fusing Unit 725 cleaning the machine 678 Clear All button 75 Color Balance 157 Color Balance Yellow Magenta Cyan Black 460 color capability 918 Color Effects 156 Color Scanning 244 499 Color Shift 158 460 Color Space 288 500 504 Combine Original Sets 210 Common Service Settings 420 Compression Method 248 Configuration Report 623 624 625 configuring the SNMP port 598 confi...

Page 1009: ...ing Secure Print jobs 363 deleting stored jobs 362 deleting stored programs 335 Density Watermark 442 Device Access 545 Dial Pause button 75 Digital Signature 302 611 dimensions 919 920 921 923 925 926 927 Direct Printing 386 Display Consumables Screens 427 Display Default of Stored Print Job List 514 Display Details of Stored Print Job List 514 document cover 54 document feeder 126 216 document f...

Page 1010: ... Faults 632 Feature Access 537 File Format 246 281 499 File Name 299 302 File Name Conflict 301 Files Retrieved By Client 510 Fine tune 100 464 Finisher D4 60 Finisher D4 with Booklet Maker 60 Finisher D5 60 finisher front door 59 finisher left door 60 finisher right door 60 finisher tray 59 60 Finishing Transport Module 63 first copy output time 919 folder creation 523 Folder List 626 Folder Name...

Page 1011: ... 929 Internet Printing Protocol 571 Internet Services 597 Interrupt button 75 Invert Image 171 IP Address 621 IPP port 571 IPsec Settings 489 IPv4 DNS Server Setup 475 IPv4 Address 475 IPv4 Gateway Address 475 IPv4 IP Filter 475 IPv4 Subnet Mask 475 IPv6 DNS Server Setup 476 IPv6 Address Manual Configuration 475 IPv6 IP Filter 476 J Job 259 job 259 Job Assembly 205 Job Complete Tone 424 Job Comple...

Page 1012: ...reversed copies of images 171 Manually Configured IPv6 Address 475 Manually Configured IPv6 Address Prefix 476 Manually Configured IPv6 Gateway 476 Mask Account ID 542 Mask User ID 541 547 Maximum Address Entries 506 Maximum Data Size per E mail 507 maximum fill line 105 107 109 113 Maximum Login Attempts by System Administrator 549 Maximum Number of Sets 466 Maximum Passcode Length for Stored Job...

Page 1013: ...guides 106 113 paper jams 852 paper size919 920 921 922 923 925 926 927 Paper Size Settings 447 Paper Supply 144 458 Paper Supply Simple Copy 135 Paper Tray Attributes 431 Paper Tray Attributes During Loading 433 paper tray capacity 918 Paper Tray Priority 433 Paper Tray Settings 429 paper type 432 927 Paper Type Mismatch 494 paper types 92 Paper Weight 922 paper weight 919 921 926 927 Passcode En...

Page 1014: ...jobs 372 printing files in a folder 315 printing pending jobs preferentially 380 printing Private Charge Print jobs 379 printing resolution 918 919 printing Sample Set jobs 369 printing stored jobs 362 Print On Demand Duration 422 Private Charge Print 376 386 problem solving 727 processing documents scanned with different settings as one job 205 Promote Job 359 Proportional 141 295 Protocol to Rec...

Page 1015: ...ttings 486 Segment Separators 208 selecting a file format for output data 246 281 selecting a folder 307 selecting a job flow sheet 326 selecting a transfer protocol 262 selecting an image quality 156 selecting an output color 244 selecting files 350 352 selecting the color for copying 148 selecting the document type 153 246 selecting the paper for copying 144 selecting the printing options 354 Se...

Page 1016: ...Start button 75 starting a scan job via computer operation 282 Step 591 Stop button 75 stopping a scan job 224 Store Send Link 279 583 Store Send Link E mail Subject 501 Store to Folder 271 582 Store to USB 273 582 Store to WSD 282 601 Store User Details 542 Stored File Manager 3 222 396 Stored File Settings 513 Stored Job Expiration Date 513 Stored Programming 329 Stored Programming Tone 425 stor...

Page 1017: ...502 User Role 538 using a proxy server 478 V Variable Size 292 Verify User Details 541 verifying server certificates 516 View Accounts 539 W warm up time 918 waste toner bottle 662 waste toner container 55 waste toner container door 55 Watermark 190 385 441 442 Web Applications 340 Web Applications Accept Cookies 521 Web Applications Clear Cache Upon Closing 521 Web Applications Delete Persistent ...

Page 1018: ...1018 Index ...

Page 1019: ...Versant 80 Press User Guide ME6843E2 2 Edition 1 September 2014 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Copyright 2014 by Fuji Xerox Co Ltd ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for Versant 80 Press

Brand: TallyGenicom Pages: 310

Brand: TallyGenicom Pages: 330

Brand: Cashino Pages: 51

Brand: Oki Pages: 72

Brand: BIO RAD Pages: 61

Brand: Xerox Pages: 128

Brand: EFI Pages: 4

Brand: Citizen Pages: 3

Brand: Keithley Pages: 97

Brand: Axiohm Pages: 6

Brand: Star Micronics Pages: 130

Brand: Infotec Pages: 195

Brand: ROBO Pages: 128

Brand: Brother Pages: 243

Brand: Brother Pages: 4

Brand: Brother Pages: 112

Brand: Brother Pages: 122

Brand: Brother Pages: 71

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands